2k16 cs6 cadillac escalade 23133525a.ai 1 6/25/2015 1:49:11 pm · cadillac escalade owner manual...

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

2k16_CS6_Cadillac_Escalade_23133525A.ai 1 6/25/2015 1:49:11 PM2k16_CS6_Cadillac_Escalade_23133525A.ai 1 6/25/2015 1:49:11 PM

Cadillac Escalade Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-9159314) - 2016 - crc - 6/25/15

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . 27

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . 115

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 177

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 186

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 346

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 363

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 373

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CADILLAC,the CADILLAC Emblem, andESCALADE are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forCadillac Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment that

was not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23133525 A First Printing ©2015 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the ownermanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

0 : Adjustable Pedals

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar® (if equipped)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

` : Do Not Puncture

^ : Do Not Service

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start


4 Introduction

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

a : Under Pressure

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 9Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 13Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Passenger Sensing System . . . 14Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 15Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 17Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . 20Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Front Automatic Braking (FAB)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . 22Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . 22Surround Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 22Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Universal Remote System . . . . . 23Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 25Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . 25Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26


6 In Brief

Instrument Panel

English Version Shown, Metric Similar


In Brief 7

1. Air Vents 0 184.

2. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 142(If Equipped).

3. Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 172.

Windshield Wiper/Washer0 117.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer0 119.

4. Hazard Warning Flashers0 172.

5. Instrument Cluster 0 125.

6. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 211.

Tow/Haul Mode SelectorButton. See Tow/Haul Mode0 216.

Range Selection Mode Buttons(If Equipped). See ManualMode 0 213.

7. Power Assist Steps 0 43 (IfEquipped).

Pedal Adjust Switch (IfEquipped). See AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal0 203.

Magnetic Ride Control Button.See Magnetic Ride Control0 226.

8. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 171.

9. Infotainment 0 177.

10. Glove Box Button. See GloveBox 0 110.

Parking Assist Button. SeeAssistance Systems forParking or Backing 0 237.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 248(If Equipped).

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 224.

11. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 178.

Instrument Panel Storage0 110.

12. CD Player. See theinfotainment manual.

13. ENGINE START/STOP Button.See Ignition Positions 0 203.

14. Steering Wheel Controls 0 116.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Controls. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 140.

15. Horn 0 117.

16. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 116.

17. Hood Release. See Hood0 266.

18. Cruise Control 0 227 (IfEquipped).

Adaptive Cruise Control 0 229(If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 242 (If Equipped).

Heated Steering Wheel 0 116(If Equipped).

Phone Button. See theinfotainment manual.

19. Automatic Transfer Case Knob(If Equipped). See Four-WheelDrive 0 217.


8 In Brief

20. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 131.

21. Electric Parking Brake 0 221 (IfEquipped).

22. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 168.

23. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 173.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within three secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

b : Press twice to open or closethe liftgate. Press once to stop theliftgate from moving.

c : Press twice to open theliftglass.


In Brief 9

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locate. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundthree times.

Press 7 and hold for more thanthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press 7 again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys 0 27 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System 0 28.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately, press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

3. Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 35.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on a power doorlock switch.

. Push down the manual lockknob on the driver door to lockall doors. Push down the lockknob on a passenger door tolock that door only.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock that door. Pull the handleagain to unlatch it.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle press Q or K onthe RKE transmitter or use the keyin the front doors. The key cylinderis covered by a cap. See DoorLocks 0 36. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 28.

Power Door Locks

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks 0 36.


10 In Brief

Keyless Access

The RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the door being opened.Pressing the button on the driverdoor handle will unlock the driverdoor. If the handle button is pressedagain within five seconds, thepassenger doors and liftgate willunlock. See “Keyless AccessOperation” in Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 28.

Liftgate

To open the liftgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press Kon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter twice to unlock all doors.Press the touch pad (1) on theunderside of the liftgate handle andlift up. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 28.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thiswill cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

To open the liftglass, press thebutton (2) above the license plate.Close the liftglass before openingthe liftgate to avoid damaging it.

Power Liftgate Operation

If equipped with a power liftgate, theswitch is on the overhead console.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

Choose the power liftgate modeselecting MAX or 3/4. Press8 onthe overhead console or on the RKEtransmitter pressb twice quickly.

Press any liftgate button while theliftgate is moving to stop it. Pressingagain reverses the direction.

To close, pressl on the bottomof the liftgate next to the latch.

To disable the power liftgatefunction, select OFF on the liftgateswitch. See Liftgate 0 39.

Windows

The power windows work when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)0 207.


In Brief 11

If equipped, the front and rearwindows have an express-downfeature. The front windows have anexpress-up feature. See Windows0 49 and Power Windows 0 50.

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 56.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:

. Press and hold the controlforward to increase or rearwardto decrease upper and lowerlumbar support at the same time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.

See Lumbar Adjustment 0 58.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks 0 58.


12 In Brief

Uplevel Seat Adjustment

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use all uplevel seat features.

Lumbar and Bolster Support

To adjust lumbar support,if equipped:

1. Turn the selection control toview seat options on the centerstack display.

2. Select lumbar support.

3. Press forward or rearward toadjust the desired amount ofsupport.

4. Press up or down to adjust theheight of the support.

To adjust bolster support,if equipped:


2. Select bolster support.

3. Press forward or rearward toadjust the amount of bolstersupport.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 56.

Massage

Driver Seat Shown, PassengerSeat Similar

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use the massage feature.

Massage may also be activated andadjusted as follows:

1. Turn the selection control (1) toview massage options on thecenter stack display.

2. Select massage feature.

3. Press up or down to selectmassage type.

See Massage 0 60.


In Brief 13

Memory Features

The SET, 1, 2, andB (Exit) buttonson the driver door are used tomanually store and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, outsidemirrors, power tilt and telescopingsteering column, adjustable pedals,and massage settings (if equipped).

Automatic Memory Recall and/orEasy Exit Recall features may beenabled in the vehiclepersonalization menus.

See Memory Seats 0 59 andVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Second Row SeatsThe second row seatbacks can befolded for additional cargo space,or the seats can be folded andtumbled for easy entry/exit to thethird row seats. The seatbacks alsorecline.

See Second Row Seats 0 63.

Third Row SeatsThird row seatbacks can be folded.See Third Row Seats 0 67.

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

The buttons are near the climatecontrols on the center stack. Tooperate, the engine must berunning.

PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press C or { to cool the driver orpassenger seat.

See Heated and Cooled Front Seats0 61.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.


14 In Brief

See Head Restraints 0 55 andPower Seat Adjustment 0 56.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:

. Safety Belts 0 69.

. How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly 0 70.

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 71.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 97.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 84

The passenger airbag statusindicator will light on the overheadconsole when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 130.

Mirror Adjustment

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

The mirror automatically dims toreduce the glare of headlamps frombehind. The dimming feature comeson when the vehicle is started.


In Brief 15

Exterior Mirrors

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors 0 47.

Power Folding Mirrors

The vehicle has power foldingmirrors. To adjust:

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

Heated Mirrors

If equipped, press1 to heat theoutside mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 178.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel,if equipped:

Press the control to move thesteering wheel up and down orforward and rearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


16 In Brief

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is on the center stack, to theleft of the touch screen.

Press the top of the switch to movethe pedals closer to your body.Press the bottom of the switch tomove the pedals away.

See Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal 0 203.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settingsbe saved and recalled. See MemorySeats 0 59.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

There are dome lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position or usingRetained Accessory Power (RAP).


In Brief 17

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.

For more information about interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 173.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

P : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol to the off position again willturn the automatic headlamps andDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works when thevehicle is shifted into the P (Park)position.

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 168

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)0 170

. Automatic Headlamp System0 171

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withzFRONT on it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT : Use this setting forintermittent wipes or Rainsense™.For intermittent wipes, turn thez


18 In Brief

FRONT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

To turn on Rainsense, presszAUTO on the lever, then turn thez FRONT band on the wiperlever to adjust the sensitivity.

. Turn the band up to a higher INTsetting for more sensitivity tomoisture.

. Turn the band down to the lowerINT setting for less sensitivity tomoisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

OFF : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes,hold the band on8 longer.

Lm : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer0 117.

Climate ControlsThe climate control buttons and thetouch screen are used to adjust theheating, cooling, and ventilation.

Climate Control Buttons

1. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

2. Fan Control

3. OFF (Fan)

4. Driver and Passenger Heatedand Cooled Seats (If Equipped)

5. Recirculation

6. Rear Window Defogger

7. Defrost

8. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

Climate Touch Screen Controls

1. Outside Temperature Display


3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)

6. Climate Control Selection(Application Tray Button)

7. Rear (Rear Climate ControlTouch Screen)

8. Air Delivery Mode Control


In Brief 19

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 178 and Rear ClimateControl System 0 182 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

The Range Selection Mode switch,if equipped, is on the shift lever.

1. To enable the Range Selectionfeature, move the shift lever tothe M (Manual Mode) position.The current range will appearnext to the M. This is thehighest attainable range withall lower gears accessible. Asan example, when 5 (Fifth)gear is selected, 1 (First)through 5 (Fifth) gears areavailable.

2. Tap the plus/minus buttons onthe shift lever to select thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions. SeeManual Mode 0 213.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 216.

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, four-wheel driveengages the front axle for extratraction.

Automatic Transfer Case

Two Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

The transfer case knob is to the leftof the steering wheel. Use this knobto shift into and out of the differentfour-wheel drive modes.

2 m : This setting is used for drivingin most street and highwaysituations.

AUTO : This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface tractionconditions are variable.


20 In Brief

4 m : Use the Four-Wheel Drive Highposition when extra traction isneeded, such as on snowy or icyroads or in most off-road situations.

4 n : This setting engages the frontaxle and delivers extra torque.Choose 4 n if you are drivingoff-road in deep sand, mud,or snow, and while climbing ordescending steep hills.

N (Neutral) : Shift the transfer caseto N (Neutral) only when towing thevehicle. See Recreational VehicleTowing 0 333 or Towing the Vehicle0 333.

See Four-Wheel Drive 0 217.

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.

Cruise Control

J : Press to turn the system onand off. A white indicator appears inthe instrument cluster when cruiseis turned on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press the control up brieflyto resume that speed or press andhold to accelerate. If the cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.


In Brief 21

SET− : Press the control downbriefly to set the speed and activatecruise control. If the cruise control isalready active, use to decreasevehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control 0 227 orAdaptive Cruise Control 0 229 (ifequipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.

y orz : Move SEL up or down togo to the previous or next selection.

S or T : Press to move betweenthe interactive display zones in thecluster. Press S to go back to theprevious menu.

SEL : Press to open a menu orselect a menu item. Press and holdto reset values on certain screens.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 140.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides agreen indicator,V, when a vehicleis detected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow avehicle much too closely. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a flashing redalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 242.

Front Automatic Braking(FAB) SystemIf the vehicle has Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it also has FAB,which includes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA). When the systemdetects a vehicle ahead in your paththat is traveling in the samedirection that you may be about tocrash into, it can provide a boost tobraking or automatically brake the


22 In Brief

vehicle. This can help avoid orlessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear.

See Front Automatic Braking (FAB)System 0 244.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signalin that direction. It may also providea Lane Departure Warning (LDW)alert as the lane marking is crossed.The system will not assist or alert ifit detects that you are activelysteering. Override LKA by turningthe steering wheel. LKA uses acamera to detect lane markingsbetween 60 km/h (37 mph) and180 km/h (112 mph).

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)0 248 and Lane Keep Assist (LKA)0 248.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding lane changecrashes that occur with movingvehicles in the side blind zone (orspot) areas or with vehicles rapidlyapproaching these areas frombehind. The LCA warning displaywill light up in the correspondingoutside side mirror and will flash ifthe turn signal is on. The Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system isincluded as part of the LCA system.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)0 245 and Lane Change Alert (LCA)0 246.

Surround VisionIf equipped, views around thevehicle display on the center stackto aid with parking and low-speedmaneuvers.

See “Surround Vision” underAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 237.

Front Vision Camera

If equipped, a view of the area infront of the vehicle displays on thecenter stack to aid with parking andlow-speed maneuvers.

See “Front Vision Camera” underAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 237.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle on thecenter stack display when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) toaid with parking and low-speedbacking maneuvers.

See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing 0 237.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) SystemIf equipped, the RCTA system usesa triangle with an arrow displayedon the RVC screen to warn of trafficbehind your vehicle that may cross


In Brief 23

your vehicle's path while inR (Reverse). In addition, beeps willsound, or the driver seat will pulse.


Parking AssistIf equipped, Front and Rear ParkingAssist (FRPA) uses sensors on thefront and rear bumpers to assistwith parking and avoiding objectsduring low speed parkingmaneuvers. It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph). FRPA maydisplay a warning triangle on theRear Vision Camera screen and agraphic on the instrument cluster toprovide the object distance. Inaddition, multiple beeps or seatpulses may occur if very close to anobject.

The vehicle may also have a higherspeed Backing Warning System andthe Rear Automatic Braking system.

See Driver Assistance Systems0 236.

Rear Automatic Braking(RAB) SystemIf the vehicle has Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) it also has the RABsystem, which is designed to helpavoid or reduce the harm caused bybacking crashes when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse). If thesystem detects the vehicle isbacking too fast to avoid a crashwith a detected object behind yourvehicle in your path, it mayautomatically brake hard to a stop.


Power Outlets

Power Outlets 12 Volt DirectCurrent

Accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle has five accessorypower outlets:

. One near the cupholders on thecenter console.

. One inside the center console.

. One on the rear of the centerconsole.

. One in the third row seat on thedriver side.

. One in the rear cargo area onthe passenger side.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

See Power Outlets 0 121.

Universal Remote System

If equipped with the UniversalRemote system, these buttons willbe in the front overhead console.


24 In Brief

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

See Universal Remote System0 164.

Sunroof

1. Open or Close2. Vent

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 207.

Vent : From the closed position,press the rear of switch (2) to ventthe sunroof.

Open/Close : To open the sunroof,press and hold switch (1) until thesunroof reaches the desiredposition. Press and hold the front ofswitch (1) to close it.

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear ofswitch (1) until the sunroof reachesthe desired position. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fullypress and release the front ofswitch (1). Press the switch again tostop it.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

See Sunroof 0 52.


In Brief 25

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin andthe StabiliTrak system that assistswith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. Bothsystems come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is started andbegins to move.

. To turn off traction control, pressand release g on the center

stack. The traction off light idisplays in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate DriverInformation Center (DIC)message displays. See RideControl System Messages0 153.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press andhold g until i and g illuminate

in the instrument cluster and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages 0 153.

. Press and release g again toturn on both systems.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 224.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflate

the tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 198. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 308.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.


26 In Brief

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Using the DIC controls on theright side of the steering wheel,display OIL LIFE on the DIC.See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 140. When remainingoil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON messagewill appear on the display. SeeEngine Oil Messages 0 149.

2. Press SEL on the DIC controlsand hold SEL down for a fewseconds to clear the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON messageand reset the oil life at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oillife display accidentally at anytime other than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition on with theengine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 271.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-800-224-1400

Canada: 1-800-882-1112

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

New Cadillac owners areautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Service Program.

See Roadside Service 0 366.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 27

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 35Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 38Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 44Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 46

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 49Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle witha Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the RKE transmitterin the vehicle, and children orothers could be caught in the pathof a closing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with an RKEtransmitter.


28 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key is used for the driver door.

The transmitter has a button on theside used to remove the key. Do notpull the key out without pressing thebutton.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview 0 376.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 373.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allowsfor vehicle entry when thetransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft). See“Keyless Access Operation” later inthis section.

The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.



Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 28.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start) :If equipped, press and release Q,then immediately press and hold/until the turn signals flash or for atleast four seconds. The engine maybe started from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 35.

Q (Lock) : Press to lock all doors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the turnsignal lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn chirpswhen Q is pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all door will lock and thenthe driver door will immediatelyunlock, if enabled in VehiclePersonalization. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157. If thepassenger door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock.

If the passenger door is open whenQ is pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.See Vehicle Alarm System 0 44.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding Q forone second will fold the mirrors. Theauto mirror folding feature will notoperate unless it is enabled. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 157.

K (Unlock) : Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within three seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps may come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled through the DIC, the turnsignal lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the exterior lampsmay turn on. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the alarm system. SeeVehicle Alarm System 0 44.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding K forone second will unfold the mirrors.The auto mirror folding feature willnot operate unless it is enabled.See Vehicle Personalization 0 157.



Press and hold K until the windowsfully open. Windows will not operateunless remote window operation isenabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157

c(Liftglass) : Press twice to openthe liftglass.

b(Liftgate) : Press twice to openor close the liftgate. Press once tostop the liftgate from moving.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm) : Press and release toinitiate vehicle locate. The turnsignal lamps flash and the hornsounds three times.

Press and hold 7 for more thanthree seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved to ON/RUN or 7 is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

Keyless Access Operation

The Keyless Access system allowsfor the doors and liftgate to beaccessed without pressing the RKEtransmitter button. The RKEtransmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)of the door being opened. If thevehicle has this feature, there will bea button on the outside doorhandles.

Keyless Access can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first lock/unlock press from thedriver door. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the lock/unlock button is pressedagain within five seconds, allpassenger doors and the liftgate willunlock.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSimilar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. It has been more thanfive seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.



Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Passenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on a passengerdoor handle will unlock all doors.Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. The lock/unlock button was usedto unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.

Passive Locking

Keyless Access will lock the vehicleseveral seconds after all doors areclosed, if the vehicle is off and atleast one RKE transmitter has beenremoved from the interior, or noneremain in the interior.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, thedoors may lock with the RKE

transmitter inside the vehicle. Donot leave the RKE transmitter in anunattended vehicle.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,Start” under Vehicle Personalization0 157.

Temporarily Disable of PassiveLocking Feature

Temporarily disable passive lockingby pressing and holding K on theinterior door switch with a door openfor at least four seconds, or untilthree chimes are heard. Passivelocking will then remain disableduntil Q on the interior door ispressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

Keyless Liftgate Opening

Press the touch pad on the rear ofthe liftgate above the license plateto open the liftgate when all doorsare unlocked or when thetransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft).

Keyless Liftglass Opening

Press the exterior liftglass button toopen the liftglass when all doors areunlocked or when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft).

Key Access

To access a vehicle with a deadtransmitter battery, see Door Locks0 36.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Each vehicle can haveup to eight transmitters matchedto it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.



To program, the vehicle must be offand all transmitters, both currentlyrecognized and new, must bewith you.

1. Remove the key from therecognized transmitter.

2. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) in the cupholderor on the passenger seat.

3. Remove the key lock cylindercap on the driver door handle.See Door Locks 0 36. Insertthe vehicle key into the keylock cylinder on the driver doorhandle; then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition five times within10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4, ETC.

4. Open the center consolestorage area and thestorage tray.

5. Place the new transmitter inthe transmitter pocket/insert, infront of the center consolestorage area.

6. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICdisplay will show that it is readyto program the next transmitter.

7. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket/insertand press K or Q on thetransmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–7.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold the ENGINE START/STOP button for approximately12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

8. Put the key back into thetransmitter.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to eighttransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all transmitters to beprogrammed must be with you.

1. Remove the vehicle key fromthe transmitter.

2. Remove the key lock cylindercap on the driver door handle.See Door Locks 0 36. Insertthe vehicle key into the keylock cylinder on the driver door



handle; then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition, five times within10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTELEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

3. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARN,then press the ENGINESTART/STOP button.

The DIC display will againshow REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

4. Repeat Step 3 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during thenext steps.

The DIC display should nowshow READY FOR REMOTE# 1.

5. Place the new transmitter inthe transmitter pocket/insert, Infront of the center consolestorage area. The storage areawill need to be opened toaccess the transmitter pocket/insert.

6. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICdisplay will show that it is readyto program the next transmitter.

7. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket/insertand press K or Q on thetransmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 5–7.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold the ENGINE START/STOP button for approximately12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

8. Return the key back into thetransmitter.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEYWAS DETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE whenstarting the vehicle. See Key andLock Messages 0 149.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center consolestorage area and thestorage tray.



2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral) press the brakepedal and the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

1. Press the button on the side ofthe transmitter near the bottomand pull the key out.

2. Separate the two halves of thetransmitter using a flat toolinserted into the bottom centerof the transmitter. Do not usethe key slot.



3. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

4. Insert the new battery on theback housing, positive sidefacing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Align the front and backhousing then snap thetransmitter together.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped with the remote startfeature, the climate control systemwill come on when the vehicle isstarted remotely depending on theoutside temperature.

The rear defog and heated andcooled seats, if equipped, may alsocome on. See Heated and CooledFront Seats 0 61 and VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting ofvehicles.

Do not use remote start if thevehicle is low on fuel.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if:

. The transmitter is in the vehicle.

. The hood is not closed.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction and themalfunction indicator lamp is on.

The engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if:

. The coolant temperature getstoo high.

. The oil pressure gets low.

The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 28 or VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flashor for at least four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on. Thedoors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. Repeat theSteps 1 and 2 for one10-minute time extension.

Place the ignition in ON/RUN/START to operate the vehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can beextended by 10 minutes, for a totalof 20 minutes, if during the first



10 minutes Steps 1 and 2 arerepeated while the engine is stillrunning. An extension can berequested 30 seconds after starting.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off to useremote start again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the ignition on and then off.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When adoor is locked, the handlewill not open it. The chanceof being thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or evendeath from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock the doors from inside thevehicle:

. Press Q on a power door lockswitch.

. Push down the manual lockknob on the driver door to lockall doors. Push down the manuallock knob on a passenger doorto lock only that door.

To unlock the doors from inside thevehicle:

. Press K on a power door lockswitch.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock it. Pull the door handleagain to unlatch it.



From outside the vehicle use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or the key in the frontdoors. The key cylinder is coveredby a cap.

Key Cylinder Access

To access the key cylinder:

1. Pull the handle open fully.

2. Slide the cap inward andremove to expose the keycylinder.

3. Replace cap by sliding itback on.

Keyless Access

A locked vehicle can be opened ifthe RKE transmitter is within 1 m(3 ft) of the door handle or theliftgate touch pad. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

Free Turning Locks

The door lock cylinder turns freelywhen either the wrong key is used,or the correct key is not fullyinserted. The free turning door lockfeature prevents the lock from beingforced open. To reset the lock, turnit to the vertical position with thecorrect key fully inserted. Removethe key and insert it again. If thisdoes not reset the lock, turn the keyhalfway around in the cylinder andrepeat the reset procedure.

Power Door Locks

Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 28.

Q (Lock) : Press to lock the doors.

K (Unlock) : Press to unlock thedoors.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking ofthe doors until five seconds after alldoors are closed.

When Q is pressed on the powerdoor lock switch while a door or theliftgate is open, a chime will soundthree times indicating delayedlocking is active.



The doors will lock automaticallyfive seconds after all doors areclosed. If a door is reopened beforethat time, the five-second timer willreset when all doors are closedagain.

Press Q on the door lock switch

again or press Q on the RKEtransmitter to lock doorsimmediately.

This feature can also beprogrammed. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This feature canbe programmed using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Lockout ProtectionIf the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN and thepower door lock switch is pressedwith the driver door open, all thedoors will lock and only the driverdoor will unlock.

If the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open,when all doors are closed thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is detected and thenumber of RKE transmitters insidehas not reduced, the driver door willunlock and the horn will chirp threetimes.

Lockout Protection can be manuallyoverridden with the driver door openby pressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout isturned on and the vehicle is off, thedriver door is open, and locking isrequested, all the doors will lock andonly the driver door will unlock. TheUnlocked Door Anti-Lockout featurecan be turned on or off using thevehicle personalization menus. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Press { to activate the safety lockson the rear doors. The indicator lightcomes on when activated.

Press { again to deactivate thesafety locks.



Doors

Liftgate

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See“Climate Control Systems”in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equippedwith a power liftgate, disablethe power liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust 0 210.

Caution

To avoid damage to the liftgate orliftgate glass, make sure the areaabove and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.

Manual Liftgate

To open the liftgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press Kon the RKE transmitter twice tounlock all doors. Press the touchpad (1) on the underside of theliftgate handle and lift up.

Press the button (2) above thelicense plate to open the liftglass,or pressc twice quickly on theRKE transmitter. Do not leave theliftglass open when raising theliftgate.



There will be a delay in the releaseof the liftglass if there is an attemptto open it while the rear wipers arein motion.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thiswill cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

If equipped with Keyless Access,the RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate toautomatically unlock it. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

Power Liftgate Operation

{ Warning

You, or others, could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

If equipped, the switch is on theoverhead console. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park).

The modes are:

. MAX: Opens to maximumheight.

. 3/4: Opens to a reduced heightthat can be set from 3/4 to fullyopen. Use to prevent the liftgatefrom opening into overheadobjects such as a garage door orroof-mounted cargo. The liftgatecan be opened all the waymanuallly.

. OFF: Opens manually only.

To open or close the liftgate, selectMAX or 3/4 mode and then:

. Pressb twice quickly on theRKE transmitter until the liftgatemoves.

. Press8 on the overheadconsole. The driver door mustbe unlocked.

. Press the touch pad on theoutside liftgate handle afterunlocking all doors. If equippedwith Keyless Access, a lockedvehicle can be opened if theRKE transmitter is within 1 m(3 ft) of the touch pad.



. Pressl on the bottom edge ofthe liftgate next to the latch toclose.

Press any liftgate button, the touchpad, orb on the RKE transmitterwhile the liftgate is moving to stop it.Pressing again restarts theoperation in the reverse direction.The touch pad on the liftgate handlecannot be used to close the liftgate.

Do not manually force the liftgate toopen or close during a power cycle.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled in extremelylow temperatures, or after repeatedpower cycling over a short period of

time. If this occurs, the liftgate canstill be operated manually. SelectOFF on the liftgate switch.

If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate will continueto completion. If the vehicle isaccelerated before the liftgate hascompleted moving, the liftgate maystop or reverse direction. Make surethe liftgate is closed and latchedbefore driving.

If the power liftgate support struthas lost pressure, the turn signalswill flash and a chime will soundwhile the liftgate automaticallycloses. See your dealer for servicebefore using the power liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,a warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection and move a short distanceaway from the obstacle. Afterremoving the obstruction, the powerliftgate operation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,

the power function will deactivate.After removing the obstructions,manually close the liftgate. This willallow normal power operationfunctions to resume.

If the vehicle is locked while theliftgate is closing, and an obstacleprevents the liftgate from completelyclosing, the horn will sound as analert that the liftgate did not close.

Pinch sensors are on the sideedges of the liftgate. If an object iscaught between the liftgate and thevehicle and presses against asensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgatewill remain open until it is activatedagain or closed manually.

Setting the 3/4 Mode

To change the position the liftgatestops at when opening:

1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode andopen the liftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate button. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifneeded.



3. Press and holdl next to thelatch on the outside of theliftgate until the turn signalsflash and a beep sounds. Thisindicates the setting has beenrecorded.

The liftgate cannot be set below aminimum programmable height.If there is no light flash or sound,then the height adjustment may betoo low.

Manual Operation

Select OFF to manually operate theliftgate. See “Manual Liftgate” at thebeginning of this section.

Caution

Do not use too much force whenclosing the liftgate to avoiddamage.

Hands-Free Operation

If equipped with Hands-Free VehicleAccess, the liftgate may beoperated with a kicking motionunder the rear bumper.

The liftgate will not operate if theRKE transmitter is not within1 m (3 ft).

The hands-free feature will not workwhile the liftgate is moving. To stopthe liftgate while in motion use oneof the liftgate switches. Length of Kick Zone

To operate, kick your foot straight upin one swift motion under the centerof the rear bumper, then pull it back.



Caution

Splashing water may cause theliftgate to open. Keep the RKEtransmitter away from the rearbumper detection area or turn theliftgate mode to OFF whencleaning or working near the rearbumper to avoid accidentalopening.

. Do not sweep your foot sideto side.

. Do not keep your foot under thebumper; the liftgate will notactivate.

. Do not touch the liftgate until ithas stopped moving.

. This feature may be temporarilydisabled under some conditions.If the liftgate does not respond tothe kick, open or close theliftgate by another method orstart the vehicle. The feature willbe re-enabled.

When closing the liftgate using thisfeature, there will be a short delay.The rear lights will flash and achime will sound. Step away fromthe gate before it starts moving.

Power Assist Steps

If equipped, the power assist stepswill deploy when the door is openedand automatically retractthree seconds after the door isclosed. The power assist steps willretract immediately if the vehiclestarts moving.

Keep hands, children, pets, objects,and clothing clear of the powerassist steps when in motion. Thesteps will reverse direction if theyencounter an obstruction whenopening or closing. Remove theobstruction, then open and close thedoor on the same side to completethe motion of the assist steps. If theobstruction is not cleared, the assiststeps remain extended while driving.

There are two other modes ofoperation:

Deploy Mode: To extend both powerassist steps for cleaning, pressjwhile the vehicle is in P (Park) orN (Neutral). Pressj again toretract them. The DIC will display amessage.

Lock Mode: Press and holdj forfour seconds to lock and disable thepower assist steps. Press andholdj for four seconds again toenable them. The DIC will display amessage.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm System

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system.

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid : Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the liftgate or the hoodis open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. Use the Keyless Accesssystem.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds, the alarmsystem will arm and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-seconddelay and immediately arm thealarm system.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, the liftgate, or thehood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system.

. Start the vehicle.



To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have exited.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter, or use theKeyless Access system.

Unlocking the driver door withthe key will not disarm thesystem or turn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.See Security Messages 0 154.

Power Sounder, InclinationSensor and Intrusion Sensor

In addition to the standardtheft-deterrent system features, thissystem may also have a powersounder, inclination sensor andintrusion sensor.

The power sounder provides anaudible alarm which is distinct fromthe vehicle’s horn. It has its ownpower source, and can sound analarm if the vehicle’s battery iscompromised.

The inclination sensor can set offthe alarm if it senses movement ofthe vehicle, such as a change invehicle orientation.

The intrusion sensor monitors thevehicle interior, and can activate thealarm if it senses unauthorized entryinto the vehicle’s interior. Do notallow passengers or pets to remainin the vehicle when the intrusionsensor is activated.

Before arming the theft-deterrentsystem and activating the intrusionsensor:

. Make sure all doors andwindows are completely closed.

. Secure any loose items such assunshades.

. Make sure there are noobstructions blocking thesensors in the front overheadconsole.

. Close DVD screens beforeleaving the vehicle.

Inclination and IntrusionSensors Disable Switch

It is recommended that the intrusionand inclination sensors bedeactivated if pets are left in thevehicle or the vehicle is beingtransported.

With the vehicle turned off, presso in the front overhead console.The indicator light will come onmomentarily, indicating that thesesensors have been disabled for thenext alarm system arming cycle.



ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 373.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition button ispressed in and a valid transmitter isfound in the vehicle.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start thevehicle.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn thevehicle off and try again.

If the RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitteror place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert next to thecenter console storage areabetween the driver and frontpassenger seats. See “Starting theVehicle with a Low TransmitterBattery” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 28.

If the engine does not start with theother transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the pocket/insert,the vehicle needs service. See yourdealer who can service the

theft-deterrent system and have anew transmitter programmed to thevehicle.

Do not leave the transmitter ordevice that disarms or deactivatesthe theft-deterrent system in thevehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.The indicator light comes on.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.

3. Adjust the outside mirror sothat the side of the vehicle andthe area behind are seen.

4. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror. Theindicator light goes off.

Exterior Automatic DimmingMirror

If equipped, the driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofheadlamps behind. This featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted. See Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror 0 49.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle may have a turn signalindicator on the mirrors that flashesin the direction of the turn or lanechange.



Folding Mirrors

Power Folding

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

Resetting the Power FoldingMirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:

. The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while folding.

. They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

. The mirrors will not stay in theunfolded position.

. The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting of the powerfolding mirrors. This sound is normalafter a manual folding operation.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger) :Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 178.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tiltsto a preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisallows the curb to be seen whenparallel parking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:

. The vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalization 0 157.



Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, there arethree buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar. See OnStarOverview 0 376.

To avoid accidental OnStar calls,clean the mirror with the ignition off.Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe rearview mirror automaticallydims to reduce the glare of theheadlamps from behind. Thisfeature comes on when the vehicleis started.

Child-View Mirror

If equipped, push up on thesunglasses bin and release. Pushthe bin back in halfway to securethe mirror in position.

Push the mirror back up when notin use.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in a



pulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys 0 27.

The driver door has switches thatcontrol all windows. Eachpassenger door has a switch thatcontrols only that window. Thepower windows work when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)0 207.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

Express-Down Windows

Windows that have theexpress-down feature allow thewindows to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press thewindow switch fully and release it toactivate the express-down feature.The express mode can be canceledat any time by briefly pressing orpulling the switch.

Express-Up Window

If equipped, the window express-upfeature allows the window to beraised without holding the switch.Pull the window switch up fully andrelease it to activate the express-upfeature. The express-up feature canbe canceled at any time by brieflypulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnected,or is not working, the driver powerwindow will need to bereprogrammed for the express-upfeature to work.



To reprogram the power windows:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START.

3. From any open position, pullthe power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Hold the switch up forapproximately two secondsafter the window is fully closed.

The window is now reprogrammed.

Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

If any object is in the path of thewindow when express-up is active,the window stops at the obstacleand auto-reverses to a presetfactory position. Weather conditionssuch as severe icing also cause thewindow to auto-reverse. Thewindow returns to normal operationonce the obstacle or condition isremoved.

Express Window Anti-PinchOverride

{ Warning

If express override is activated,the window will not reverseautomatically. You or others couldbe injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you useexpress override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

The anti-pinch feature can beoverridden in a supervised mode.Hold the window switch in thepartially or fully pulled up position.The window rises for as long as theswitch is held. Once the switch isreleased, the express mode isreactivated.

In this mode, the window can stillclose on an object in its path. Usecare when using the override mode.

Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.

. PressZ to activate the rearwindow locks. An indicator lightwill illuminate when the featureis on.

. PressZ again to deactivate therear window locks.



Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow or, if equipped, extendalong the rod.

Roof

Sunroof

1. Open or Close2. Vent

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 207.

Vent : From the closed position,press the rear of switch (2) to ventthe sunroof.

Open/Close : To open the sunroof,press and hold switch (1) until thesunroof reaches the desiredposition. Press and hold the front ofswitch (1) to close it.

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear ofswitch (1) until the sunroof reachesthe desired position. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fullypress and release the front ofswitch (1). Press the switch again tostop it.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.



Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this isnormal.


54 Seats and Restraints

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 56Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 58Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Rear SeatsHeated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . 76Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 77

Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 79When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Passenger Sensing System . . . 84Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 88

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 89Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Infants and Young Children . . . . 92Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 94Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 96Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . 97

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 104

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . . 107


Seats and Restraints 55

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.



Second Row Seats

The vehicle's second row seatshave head restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The second row seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Third Row Seats

The third row seat head restraintcan be lowered to allow for bettervisibility when the rear seat isunoccupied.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on the top of theseatback and push the headrestraint down.

Return the lowered head restraint tothe upright position until it locks intoplace. Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure it is locked.

If you are installing a child restraintin the third row seat, see “Securinga Child Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 97.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

Base Shown, Uplevel Similar



To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks 0 58.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment 0 58.

Some vehicles are equipped with afeature that activates a vibratingpulse alert in the driver seat to helpthe driver avoid crashes. See DriverAssistance Systems 0 236.

Uplevel Seat Adjustment

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use all uplevel seat features.

Lumbar and Bolster Support

To adjust lumbar support,if equipped:


2. Select lumbar support.

3. Press forward or rearward toadjust the desired amount ofsupport.

4. Press up or down to adjust theheight of the support.

To adjust bolster support,if equipped:


2. Select bolster support.

3. Press forward or rearward toadjust the amount of bolstersupport.

Upper Shoulder Support

To adjust upper shoulder support,if equipped:


2. Select upper shoulder support.



3. Press forward or rearward toadjust the amount of uppershoulder support.

Lumbar Adjustment

Base

To adjust the lumbar support:

. Press and hold the controlforward to increase or rearwardto decrease upper and lowerlumbar support at the same time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.

Reclining Seatbacks

Base Shown, Uplevel Similar


. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.



Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Memory Seats

The SET, 1, 2, andB (Exit) buttonson the driver door are used tomanually store and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, outsidemirrors, power tilt and telescopingsteering column, adjustable pedals(if equipped), and massage settings(if equipped).

Storing Memory Positions

To store positions to the 1 and 2buttons:

1. The ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

2. Adjust the driver seat, outsidemirrors, power tilt andtelescoping steering column,adjustable pedals (if equipped),and massage settings (ifequipped) to the desiredpositions.

3. Press and release SET. A beepwill sound.

4. Immediately press and hold 1until two beeps sound.

5. Repeat steps 1–4 for a seconddriver using 2.

To store exit positions and easy exitfeatures to theB (Exit) button,

repeat steps 1–4 usingB to storeyour positions for getting out of thevehicle.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

Press and hold 1, 2, orB (Exit) tomanually recall the previouslystored memory positions andmassage settings (if equipped).Releasing 1, 2, orB before thestored positions are reached stopsthe recall.

If the massage feature is off whenthe memory recall is performed, thepreviously stored type and intensitywill be recalled, but it will remain offuntil activated with the massagecontrol.

Automatically Recalling MemoryPositions (Auto Memory Recall)

If programmed on in the vehiclepersonalization menus, the Auto(Automatic) Memory Recall featureautomatically recalls the currentdriver’s previously stored 1 or 2



position and massage settings (ifequipped) when the ignition ischanged from ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

See “Auto Memory Recall” under"Comfort and Convenience" inVehicle Personalization 0 157.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls; press thepower tilt and telescoping steeringcolumn control; or press theadjustable pedal control.

Easy Exit Recall

If programmed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, the easy exitfeature automatically recalls thepreviously stored EXIT positionswhen leaving the vehicle. See“Storing Memory Positions”previously in this section. See alsoVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Easy exit recall automaticallyactivates when one of the followingoccurs:

. The vehicle is turned off and thedriver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

If the vehicle driver has changed, insome vehicles the Driver ID may bedisplayed for the first few ignitioncycles.

RKE transmitters are not labeledwith a number. If your memory seatposition is stored to 1 or 2 but thisposition is not automaticallyrecalling, then change the storedposition or switch RKE transmitterswith the other driver.

Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat, power tilt and telescopingsteering column, and/or adjustablepedals while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction. Then doone of the following:

. If automatically or manuallyrecalling the stored memoryposition, press and hold theappropriate manual control fortwo seconds. Try recalling againby pressing the appropriatememory button.

. If recalling the exit position,press and hold the appropriatemanual control for the exitfeature not recalling fortwo seconds. Then try recallingthe exit position again.

If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Massage

Driver Seat Shown, PassengerSeat Similar

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use the massage feature.



Massage may be activated andadjusted as follows:

1. Press and release or hold theselection control (1) to scroll tothe massage options on thecenter stack display.

2. Select massage feature.

3. Press up or down to select themassage type.

4. Press forward or rearward tochange the intensity.

5. To activate massage at lastmassage type and intensitysettings or to turn massage off,press the massage On/Offcontrol (2).

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, people

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

with such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

The buttons are near the climatecontrols on the center stack. Tooperate, the engine must berunning.

PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.


Press C or { to cool the driver orpassenger seat.

When this feature is off, the heatedand cooled seat symbols on thebuttons are white. When a heatedseat is turned on, the symbol turnsred. When a cooled seat is turnedon, the symbol turns blue.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest. If the heated seats are onhigh for an extended time, their levelmay automatically be lowered.



The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Auto Heated andCooled Seats

During a remote start, the heated orcooled seats may turn onautomatically if enabled in vehiclepersonalization. When it is coldoutside, the heated seats turn on,and when it is hot outside, thecooled seats turn on. The heated orcooled seats are canceled when theignition is turned on. Press theheated or cooled seat button to usethe heated or cooled seats after thevehicle is started.

The heated or cooled seat indicatorlights do not turn on during a remotestart.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated or cooled seats will notturn on during a remote start unlessthey are enabled in the vehiclepersonalization menu. See RemoteVehicle Start 0 35 and VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Auto Heated Seats

When the vehicle is on, this featurewill automatically activate theheated seats at the level required bythe vehicle's interior temperature.

The active high, medium, low or offheated seat level will be indicatedby the manual heated seat buttonlights on the center stack. Use themanual heated buttons on thecenter stack to turn the auto heatedseats off. If the passenger seat isunoccupied, the auto heated seatsfeature will not activate the seat.The auto heated seats feature canbe programmed to always beenabled when the vehicle is on. See"Auto Heated Seats" under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Rear Seats

Heated Rear Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns.See the Warning under Heatedand Cooled Front Seats 0 61.

The buttons are on the rear of thecenter console.



With the ignition in ON/RUN/START,press M or L to heat the left or rightoutboard seat cushion. An indicatoron the rear climate control displayappears when this feature is on.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest.

If the heated seats are on high foran extended time, their level mayautomatically be lowered.

Second Row SeatsThe second row seats can be foldedfor additional cargo space or foldedand tumbled for easy entry and exitto the third row seat.

Reclining Seatbacks


1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

1. Lift the lever fully whileapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.If the lever is lifted withoutapplying pressure, the seat willrelease to a folded position.

2. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.



Manual Fold and TumbleFeature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seatin a tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbledseat is not locked. It can movewhen the vehicle is in motion.People in the vehicle could beinjured in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position beforedriving the vehicle. Push and pullon the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or onthe seat.

2. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat to release theseatback.

The seatback will fold forwardto create a flat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat,try moving the front seatforward and/or put the frontseatback in the uprightposition.



3. Lift the lever again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Third Row Seat

{ Warning

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seating

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

position. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat:


2. Pull the strap on the bottomrear of the second row seat torelease the seatback. Theseatback will fold forward.

3. Pull the strap again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Automatic Fold and TumbleFeature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seatin a tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbledseat is not locked. It can movewhen the vehicle is in motion.People in the vehicle could be

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

injured in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position beforedriving the vehicle. Push and pullon the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

{ Warning

Automatically folding andtumbling the seat when someoneis sitting in the seat, could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always make sure there is no onesitting in the seat before pressingthe automatic seat release button.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safety

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

belts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:


Driver Side Rear Panel ButtonShown

2. Press the automatic seatrelease button on the panelbehind the rear doors. Theseatback automaticallyfolds flat.

3. Press the button again torelease the rear of the seatfrom the floor. The seat willtumble forward.



Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Cargo Area

1. Second Row Power SeatButtons

2. Third Row Power SeatButtons

To fold and tumble the seat from thecargo area:


2. Press the button (1) on the sidetrim of the cargo area to foldthe seatback.

The left button folds the leftseatback, and the right buttonfolds the right seatback.

3. Press the button again torelease the rear of the seatfrom the floor. The seat willtumble forward.

The buttons (2) can be used to foldthe third row seatbacks from thecargo area. See Third Row Seats0 67.

Returning the Seat to theSitting Position

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return the seat to the sittingposition from the tumbled position:

1. Pull the seat down until itlatches to the floor. Theseatback cannot be raised ifthe seat is not latched to thefloor.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked.

3. For the 60/40 split-bench seat,make sure the safety belt in thecenter seating position is notcaught between the two seatsand is not twisted.

Third Row Seats

Folding the Seatback

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.



The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.

The third row seatbacks can befolded to increase cargo space.



To fold the seatback:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the seat.


3. Fully lower the head restraints.See Head Restraints 0 55. Putthe second row seatback in theupright position. See SecondRow Seats 0 63.

4. Disconnect the rear safety beltmini-latch, using a key in theslot on the mini-buckle, and letthe belt retract into theheadliner. Stow the mini-latchin the holder in the headliner.

5. Press and hold the switch (2)on the side trim of the cargoarea to fold the seatback.

The left switch folds the leftseatback, and the right switchfolds the right seatback.

6. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.



The switches (1) can be used to foldor fold and tumble the second rowseats from the cargo area. SeeSecond Row Seats 0 63.

Returning the Seatback to theUpright Position



To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the seat.

2. Press and hold the switch (2)on the side trim of the cargoarea to raise the seatback.

The left switch raises the leftseatback, and the right switchraises the right seatback.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

3. Reconnect the center safetybelt mini-latch to themini-buckle. Do not let it twist.

4. Pull on the safety belt to besure the mini-latch is secure.

5. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders 0 129.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren 0 90 or Infants and YoungChildren 0 92. Follow those rules foreveryone's protection.



It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong

pelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulderbelt under both arms orbehind your back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable safetybelt, and the safety belt is notattached, see Third Row Seats 0 67for instructions on reconnecting thesafety belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.



2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may beengaged. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the frontoutboard seating position mayaffect the passenger sensingsystem. See PassengerSensing System 0 84.

For front seating positions,if the webbing locks in the latchplate before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate flat tounlock.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If the latchplate will not go fully into thebuckle, check if the correctbuckle is being used.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender 0 76.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”



in this section for instructionson use and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

For third row seats, it may benecessary to pull stitching onthe safety belt through the latchplate to fully tighten the lap belton smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

For third row seats, slide the latchplate up the safety webbing whenthe safety belt is not in use. Thelatch plate should rest on thestitching on the safety belt.

Always stow the safety belt slowly.If the safety belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, theretractor may lock and cannot bepulled out. If this happens, pull thesafety belt straight out firmly tounlock the webbing, and then

release it. If the webbing is stilllocked in the retractor, see yourdealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thebelt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andfront outboard passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly 0 70.



Push down on the release button tomove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

Move the adjuster up by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Automatic Safety BeltTightening System

The vehicle may have the AutomaticSafety Belt Tightening System.

The system activates duringemergency braking and/or suddendriving maneuvers and releaseswhen driving conditions return tonormal.

The system will not activate if theTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl system is not functioningproperly. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 224.If there is a problem with theAutomatic Safety Belt TighteningSystem, a message displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC). SeeSafety Belt Messages 0 154. Othersafety belt functions are not affectedby the Automatic Safety BeltTightening System.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioner

activation are met. Safety beltpretensioners can also help tightenthe safety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash 0 77.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

{ Warning

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.



Rear safety belt comfort guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

Second Row Outboard SeatingPositions

The vehicle has comfort guides forthe second row outboard seatingpositions. The comfort guides arestored on a clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard seatback.

To install:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard seatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be behind thebelt with the plastic guide onthe front.



4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide onto its storage clip.

Third Row Seating Positions

Comfort guides are availablethrough your dealer for third rowseating positions. Instructions areincluded with the guides.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safety



belt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders 0 129.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care 0 77.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 130.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver.

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

. A front center airbag for thedriver and front outboardpassenger.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand for the second and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on anattached label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For the front center airbag, the wordAIRBAG is on the inboard side ofthe driver seatback.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? 0 81.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The safety belts andthe front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the front centerarmrest or console in vehicleswith a front center airbag.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 90 orInfants and Young Children 0 92.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 130.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.



The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

The front center airbag is in theinboard side of the driver seatback.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond and third row outboardpassengers are in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of an

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

inflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat or consoleaccessories that block theinflation path of a seat-mountedside impact airbag or the frontcenter airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie-downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System 0 78.Airbags are designed to inflate if the

impact exceeds the specific airbagsystem's deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds are used topredict how severe a crash is likelyto be in time for the airbags toinflate and help restrain theoccupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, and

whether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

The vehicle also has a seat positionsensor that enables the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat. The seat position sensorprovides information that is used toadjust the deployment of the driverfrontal airbag.

The front center airbag is designedto inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending upon thelocation of the impact, when eitherside of the vehicle is struck. Inaddition, the front center airbag isdesigned to inflate when thesensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside. The front center airbag is not



designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,or rear impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or the repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 79.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare also designed to help containthe head and chest of occupants inthe outboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows. Therollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 81 formore information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.



What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated. Thefront center airbag and roof-railairbags may still be at least partiallyinflated for some time after theyinflate. Some components of theairbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 79.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. You can lock the doors,

and turn off the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers by usingthe controls for those features.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.



. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy 0 374and Event Data Recorders0 374.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will bevisible during the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or

OFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator 0 130.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seatand safety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant anddetermine if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag should beallowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.



Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:

. The front outboard passengerseat is unoccupied.

. The system determines an infantis present in a child restraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 130.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints should



wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 130 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat) 0 105 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) 0 107.

Make sure the safety beltretractor is locked by pullingthe shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor wheninstalling the child restraint,even if the child restraint isequipped with a safety beltlock-off. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Then

slightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatbackis not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 55.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.



If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.If this happens, use the followingsteps to allow the system to detectthat person and enable the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such asblankets, cushions, seatcovers, seat heaters, or seatmassagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of thebelt is pulled out all the way,the child restraint lockingfeature will be engaged. Thismay unintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system toturn the airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way,and then buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and havethe person remain in thisposition for two to three minutesafter the on indicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.



A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 88for more information aboutmodifications that can affect howthe system operates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

seatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation 0 372.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

are close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changingany parts of the front seats, safetybelts, airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, any airbag module, ceiling orpillar garnish trim, overheadconsole, front sensors, side impactsensors, airbag wiring, or frontcenter console.



Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system thatincludes sensors as part of the frontoutboard passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System0 84.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels 0 315 for additionalimportant information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices0 365.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 130.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do not

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 79. See your dealerfor service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properly

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 130.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide, if available.See “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 71. If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.



. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 71.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safety

restraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safetybelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, the

restraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.



{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.



Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the child

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

restraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 97. Children canbe endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions are

important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.



Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a front

center airbag, a child restraint canbe installed in any second rowseating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 84 for additional information.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.



Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the child

restraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments. In thiscase, the safety belt must be used(with top tether where available) tosecure the child restraint. See



Securing Child Restraints (RearSeat) 0 107 or Securing ChildRestraints (Front Passenger Seat)0 107.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row— 60/40

H (Lower Anchor) : Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.



I (Top Tether Anchor) : Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

Second Row— Bucket

H (Lower Anchor) : Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.


Third Row Seat


To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is near the top tetheranchors for second row seats. Forthird row seats, the top tetheranchor symbol is on the flipperpanel.

Second Row Seat — Bucket

For models with bucket second rowseating, the top tether anchors areat the bottom rear of the seat



cushion for each seating position inthe second row. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Second Row Seat — 60/40

For models with 60/40 second rowseating, the top tether anchors areat the bottom rear of the seatcushion for each seating position inthe second row. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Third Row Seat

For the third row seat, the top tetheranchors are on the back of theseatback. Move the flipper panelrearward to access the anchors. Besure to use an anchor on the sameside of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 96 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors or withthe safety belt, the child restraintwill not be able to protect the childcorrectly. In a crash, the childcould be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.



{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it is

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

wrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint canbe installed in any second rowseating position.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 96.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.



1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the safety beltsand top tether whenrecommended by the childrestraint manufacturer. Refer toyour child restraintmanufacturer instructions andthe instructions in this manual.For the third row outboardseating positions, if the headrestraint interferes with theproper installation of the childrestraint, then the headrestraint may be removed. See“Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 97.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached,attach and tighten the toptether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

For the third row seat,move the flipper panelrearward to access the toptether anchors.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether over theseatback.



If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and you areusing a single tether, raisethe head restraint androute the tether under thehead restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether around theinboard or outboard sideof the head restraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixed or anadjustable head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback and forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Third Row Seats0 67 for additional information.



2. Press the buttons on the headrestraint posts and pull up onthe head restraint.

3. Route the top tether of the childrestraint under the headrestraint.

4. With the head restraint facingrearward, insert the headrestraint posts into the holes inthe top of the seatback.

5. Push the head restraint down.

6. Try to move the head restraintto make sure that it is locked inplace.

7. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 97 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is

secured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 97 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the safetybelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as theinstructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 96.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For the third row outboardseating positions, if the headrestraint interferes with theproper installation of the childrestraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 97.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check to see ifthe correct buckle isbeing used.


4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the childrestraint and see LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 97.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

If the head restraint was removedfor a third row outboard seatingposition, reinstall it before theseating position is used. See “Head

Restraint Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 97 for additionalinformation on reinstalling the headrestraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 96.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 84and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 130 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure a

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

forward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 84 for additional information.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 97 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 130.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt, if needed.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.




5. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 84.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


110 Storage

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 110Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 110Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 111Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Center Console Storage . . . . . . 112

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Instrument Panel Storage

Touch the bottom of the climatecontrol system panel until the doorautomatically starts to open. The

storage area may contain a USBport and auxiliary jack. See theinfotainment manual.

Keep the storage area door closedwhile driving.

Touch the bottom of the climatecontrol system again until the doorautomatically starts to close.

Glove Box

To open, press the button. Close theglove box manually.


Storage 111

Cupholders

To access the cupholders, press thecover and release.

There is storage in front of thecupholders. Push forward on thehandle to open.

Sunglasses Storage

If equipped, sunglasses storage ison the overhead console. Press thefixed button on the cover andrelease to access. There may be achild-view mirror located within thesunglasses bin. Release the bin andthen push up halfway to secure inposition.

Armrest StorageFor vehicles with a rear seatarmrest, pull the loop at the top ofthe armrest down to access thecupholders.

Rear Storage

There is storage in the floor of therear cargo area. Lift the handle toaccess. There is a removabledivider to help organize.


112 Storage

Center Console Storage

Pull the handle and lift to access.There are auxiliary jacks, USBports, an accessory power outlet, atote compartment and a deviceholder inside.

On the rear of the console there areauxiliary jacks, a power outlet, and astorage area.

See Power Outlets 0 121 and theinfotainment manual.

If equipped, press to turn on thecooled compartment inside thecenter console storage.

The cooled compartment will helpkeep cold liquids cold, but is notintended to chill warm liquids. Donot use for items that need to berefrigerated.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Cover

{ Warning

An unsecured cargo cover couldstrike people in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash. Store thecargo cover securely or remove itfrom the vehicle.

To use the cargo cover, if equipped:

1. Pull the cover handle towardthe rear of the vehicle.

2. Latch the cover posts into theretaining sockets on the cargoarea trim panels.

To return the cover to the retractedposition:

1. Pull up on the cover handle torelease the cover posts fromthe retaining sockets.

2. Let the cover move forward tothe full retracted position.


Storage 113

To remove the cover:

1. Let the cover go all the wayinto the holder.

2. Grasping the driver side coverend cap, push the cover endcap toward the passenger sideof the vehicle.

3. Swing the cover rearward andtake it out of the vehicle.

To put the cover in the vehicle:

1. Make sure the cover slot in theholder faces rearward with theround surface facing down.

2. Hold the cover at an angle andplace the cover end cap intothe slot in the passenger sidetrim panel.

3. Move the other end of thecover forward and hold it nextto the driver side trimpanel slot.

4. Press the end caps in, to allowthe cover to fit into the trim slot.

5. Pull lightly on the cover holderto make sure it is secure.

On long wheelbase models thereare two cover positions. The slotsfurthest forward allow the cover tobe used if the third seat is removedor folded down. The cover can beinstalled and removed fromeither side.

Roof Rack System

{ Warning

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

If equipped, the roof rack can beused to load items. For roof racksthat do not have crossrails included,GMCertified crossrails can bepurchased as an accessory. Seeyour dealer for additionalinformation.


114 Storage

Caution

Loading cargo on the roof rackthat weighs more than 100 kg(220 lb) or hangs over the rear orsides of the vehicle may damagethe vehicle. Load cargo so that itrests evenly between thecrossrails, making sure to fastencargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 198.

A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is located above the rearwindow glass. Make sure itemsloaded on the roof of the vehicle donot block or damage the CHMSL.


Instruments and Controls 115

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 116Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 116Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 116Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 117Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 129Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 130Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Charging System Light . . . . . . . 131Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 131

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . 135Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 135Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . 136Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 137Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 137Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 138Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 138Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 139Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 139Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . 142

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Brake System Messages . . . . . 146Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . 147Cruise Control Messages . . . . . 147Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . 148Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . 149Engine Power Messages . . . . . 149Fuel System Messages . . . . . . . 149Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 149Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Airbag System Messages . . . . 153Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . . 154


116 Instruments and Controls

Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 154Service Vehicle Messages . . . . 154Steering SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Transmission Messages . . . . . . 155Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . 156Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . 157Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 157

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . 164Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel,if equipped:

Press the control to move thesteering wheel up and down orforward and rearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.

Heated Steering Wheel

( (Heated Steering Wheel) :If equipped with a heated steeringwheel, press to turn on or off. Anindicator next to the button is litwhen the feature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.



Horn

To sound the horn, pressa on thesteering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withzFRONT on it.

1 (High Speed) : Fast wipes.

w (Low Speed) : Slow wipes.

3 INT (Intermittent Wipes) : Turnthez FRONT band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

OFF : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

8 (Mist) : For a single wipe, turnto8, then release. For several

wipes, hold the band on8 longer.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement 0 285.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. An internal circuitbreaker to the motor will stop themotor until it cools down.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are onw,1, or3 INT,they will immediately stop.

Ifz FRONT is then moved toOFF before the driver door isopened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing or Rainsense,the wipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

Rainsense™

With Rainsense, a sensor near thetop center of the windshield detectsthe amount of water on thewindshield and controls thefrequency of the windshield wiper.

Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

3 INT (Rainsense WipeSensitivity) : Turn thez FRONTband on the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity when Rainsense isturned on.



. Turn the band up to a higher INTsetting for more sensitivity tomoisture.

. Turn the band down to the lowerINT setting for less sensitivity tomoisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

z AUTO (Rainsense On/Off) :Press to turn Rainsense on or off.When turned on andz FRONT isin one of the Rainsense wipesensitivity positions, the wipers canbe adjusted for more or lesssensitivity to moisture by adjustingthe INT position. When turned off,the wipers operate as timedintermittent wipers and can beadjusted for more or less frequentwipes.

Ifz AUTO is on when the ignitionis turned on, or if the ignition is inON/RUN and thez FRONT bandis in one of the sensitivity settingswhenz AUTO is turned on or off,a message may display indicating ifRainsense was turned on or off.

If the ignition is in ON/RUN andzFRONT is not in one of thesensitivity settings whenz AUTOis turned on, a message maydisplay indicating that the wiperband must be in one of thesensitivity settings for Rainsense tooperate.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windshield wiper lever toOFF. This disables the automaticRainsense windshield wipers.

With Rainsense, if the transmissionis in N (Neutral) and the vehiclespeed is very slow, the wipers mayautomatically stop at the base of thewindshield.

The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

Windshield Washer

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

L m (Washer Fluid) : Push thepaddle marked with the windshieldwasher symbol at the top of the turnsignal lever to spray washer fluidand activate the wipers. The wiperswill continue until the paddle isreleased or the maximum wash timeis reached. When the paddle isreleased, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid 0 279for information on filling thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.



Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper control is on the turnsignal lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

OFF : Turns the wiper off.

INT (Intermittent Wipes) : Turns onthe rear wiper with a delay betweenwipes.

ON (Rear Wipes) : Turns on therear wiper.

= REAR (Rear Wiper Wash) :Press this button on the end of thelever to spray washer fluid on therear window. The wipers will clearthe rear window and either stop orreturn to your preset speed. Formore washer cycles, press and holdthe button.

The rear window wiper/washer willnot operate if the liftgate or liftglassis open or ajar. If the liftgate orliftglass is opened while the rearwiper is on, the wiper returns to theparked position and stops.

Rear Wiper Arm AssemblyProtection

When using an automatic car wash,move the rear wiper control to OFFto disable the rear wiper. In somevehicles, if the transmission is inN (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the rear wiper willautomatically park under the rearspoiler.

The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, therear wiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the shift lever isin R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performing lowor high speed wipes. If the rearwiper control is off, the shift lever is

in R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performinginterval wipes, then the rear wiperautomatically performs intervalwipes.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 157.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid 0 279.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna,StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speedinformation.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in an



open area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages 0 147 for the messagesthat may be displayed for thecompass.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See “Home Page” in theinfotainment manual for informationabout how to use the menu system.

Setting the Clock

Time

To set the time:

1. From the Home Page, touchthe SETTINGS screen button,then touch Time and Date.

2. Touch Set Time, then touch +or − to increase or decreasehours or minutes, and changeAM or PM.

3. Touch 12-24 Hr for a 12 or24 hour clock.

4. Touch [ Back to go back to theprevious menu.

Date

To set the date:

1. Touch the SETTINGS screenbutton and touch Timeand Date.

2. Touch Set Date and touch + or− to increase or decreasemonth, day, or year.


Auto Set

When on, the time and date willautomatically update.

To set auto set:

1. Touch the SETTINGS screenbutton, then touch Timeand Date.

2. Touch Set Time or Set Date.

3. Touch Auto Set, then selectOn-Cell Network or Off-Manualto manually set the timeand date.


If auto set is on, the time displayedon the clock may not updateimmediately when driving into a newtime zone.

Clock Display

When on, the digital clock willdisplay on the infotainment screen.

To set the clock display:

1. Touch the SETTINGS screenbutton and touch Timeand Date.

2. Touch Clock Display, thenselect Off or On.




Power OutletsPower Outlets 12 Volt DirectCurrent

Accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has five accessorypower outlets:

. One near the cupholders on thecenter console.

. One inside the center console.

. One on the rear of the centerconsole.

. One in the third row seat on thedriver side.

. One in the rear cargo area onthe passenger side.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

The accessory power outlets arepowered as follows:

. The power outlet near thecupholders on the centerconsole is powered in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) mode.

This outlet can be configured tooperate using RAP or batterypower. If the power outlet isused while in the battery powermode, this could causeinterference between the RKEtransmitter and the vehicle, andthe vehicle may not start. SeeIgnition Positions 0 203.

. The power outlets inside thecenter console and on the rearof the center console arepowered when the ignition is inON/RUN/START or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until the driverdoor is opened within10 minutes of turning off thevehicle. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 207.

. The power outlets in the thirdrow seat and in the rear cargoarea are powered at all times.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum15 amp rating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.



When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 263.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110/120 VoltAlternating Current

This power outlet can be used toplug in electrical equipment thatuses a maximum limit of 150 watts.

The 110/120 volt power outlet is onthe rear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN/START, equipment

requiring less than 150 watts isplugged into the outlet, and nosystem fault is detected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is in LOCK/OFF orif the equipment is not fully seatedinto the outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the ignition off andthen back to ON/RUN. The powerrestarts when equipment using 150watts or less is plugged into theoutlet and a system fault is notdetected.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such asmicrocomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps.

. Medical equipment.

Wireless ChargingThe vehicle may have wirelesscharging on top of the centerconsole. See Center ConsoleStorage 0 112. The systemwirelessly charges one PMA or Qicompatible mobile device. To checkfor phone or other devicecompatibility, seewww.gmtotalconnect.com.

{ Warning

Wireless charging can affect theoperation of an implantedpacemaker or other medicaldevices. If you have one, it isrecommended to consult withyour doctor before using thewireless charging system.



The vehicle must be in ON/RUN,ACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). Thewireless charging feature may notcorrectly indicate charging when thevehicle is in RAP. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 207.

The operating temperature is -20 °C(-4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for thecharging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to35 °C (95 °F) for the phone.

{ Warning

Remove all metal objects from thecharging pad before chargingyour mobile device. Metal objects,such as coins, keys, rings,or paper clips, between the phoneand charging pad will becomevery hot. On the rare occasionthat the charging system does notdetect a metal object, and theobject gets wedged between thephone and charger, remove thephone and allow the metallicobject to cool before removing itfrom the charging pad, to preventburns.

To charge a mobile device:

1. Remove all objects from thecharging pad. The system maynot charge if there are anyobjects on the charging pad.

2. Place the mobile device faceup on the@ symbol on thecharging pad.

3. The~ will display on theVon the infotainment screen.This indicates that the mobiledevice is properly positionedand charging. If a phone isplaced on the charging padand~ does not display,remove the phone from the

pad, and wait three secondsbefore placing/aligning thephone on the pad again.

Cigarette LighterFor vehicles with a cigarette lighter,it is located in the center consolenear the cupholders. Press on theaccess door to open it and use thelighter.

To use the cigarette lighter, push itin all the way, and let go. When it isready, it will pop back out by itself.

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let the lighterback away from the heatingelement when it is hot. Damagefrom overheating can occur to thelighter or heating element, or afuse could be blown. Do not holda cigarette lighter in while it isheating.



AshtraysFor vehicles with an ashtray, it is inthe center console cupholder.

Caution

If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, pull it fromthe cupholder. Push it back down tobe sure it is secure.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Balanced Cluster Shown, Metric Similar



Reconfigurable InstrumentCluster

The cluster display layout can bechanged.

Balanced Configuration

The Balanced configuration hasthree interactive display zones: onein the center of each of the gauges.

Enhanced Configuration

The Enhanced configuration hasthree interactive display zones.

Use the five-way control on the rightside of the steering wheel to movebetween the different display zonesand scroll through the differentdisplays.

To change the cluster configuration:

1. Find the Options page in one ofthe interactive display zones onthe cluster.

2. Press SEL to enter theOptions menu.

3. Scroll down to highlight DisplayLayout. Then press SEL toselect it.

4. Each layout in the menu isrepresented by a small previewimage of the display layout.Scroll up or down and highlightthe selection. Press SEL toselect the desired clusterconfiguration.

5. Exit the Display Layout menuby pressing S.

Cluster Application Displays

The cluster can display informationregarding Navigation, Audio, andPhone.

Navigation

If there is no active route, acompass will be displayed. If thereis an active route, press SEL to endroute guidance or turn the voiceprompts on or off.

Audio

While the Audio application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter theAudio menu. In the Audio menu,search for music, select fromfavorites, or change the audiosource.



Phone

While the Phone application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter thePhone menu. In the Phone menu,if there is no active phone call, viewrecent calls, select from favorites,or scroll through contacts. If there isan active call, mute the phone orswitch to handset operation.

Cluster Options Menu

To enter the cluster Options menu:

1. Use the five-way control on theright side of the steering wheelto find the Options page in oneof the interactive display zoneson the cluster.

2. Press SEL on the center of thefive-way control to enter theOptions menu.

Units : Press SEL while Units ishighlighted to enter the Unit menu.Choose US or metric units bypressing SEL while the desired itemis highlighted. A checkmark will bedisplayed next to the selected item.

Info Pages : Press SEL while InfoPages is highlighted to select theitems to be displayed in the DIC infodisplays. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 140.

Fav Button Options : Press SELwhile Fav Button Options ishighlighted to select between FAVPrimary and SEEK Primary. Thisselection allows for configuration oftheC andB steering wheelcontrols. When FAV Primary isselected, pressingC andB will goto the next or previous favorite andpressing and holdingC andB willseek. When SEEK Primary isselected, pressingC andB will

seek and pressing and holding CandB will go to the next orprevious favorite.

Display Layout : Press SEL whileDisplay Layout is highlighted tochange the configuration of thecluster. See “ReconfigurableInstrument Cluster” earlier in thissection.

Open Source Software : PressSEL while Open Source Software ishighlighted to display open sourcesoftware information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 140.



TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

Balanced Configuration Shown

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuelgauge pointing to the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicleshould be refueled soon.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:

. At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric Balanced ConfigurationShown



English Balanced ConfigurationShown

This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's engine.

While driving under normaloperating conditions, if the needlemoves into the red area, the engineis too hot. Pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 84.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several times ifthe passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,



grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System0 78.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages0 153.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 84 for importantsafety information. The passengerairbag status indicator is in theoverhead console.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or the on or off symbol, to let youknow the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.



If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 130 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) also displays amessage.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages 0 146.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check EngineLight)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is inService Only Mode. See IgnitionPositions 0 203.



Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead to

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

costly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 265.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow the

previous guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. If fuel has been added to thevehicle using the capless funneladapter, make sure that it hasbeen removed. See “Filling theTank with a Portable Gas Can”under Filling the Tank 0 251.The diagnostic system candetect if the adapter has beenleft installed in the vehicle,allowing fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the adapter removedmay turn off the light.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require at



least one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. See Fuel0 250.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that arenot used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 263. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is in ServiceOnly Mode.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recentlybeen replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remaining

circuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light comes on briefly when thevehicle is turned on. If it does notcome on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

If the light comes on and stays on,there is a brake problem.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English

This light comes on when theparking brake is applied. If the lightcontinues flashing after the parkingbrake is released, or while driving,there is a problem with the ElectricParking Brake system or anothersystem. A message may also

display in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Brake SystemMessages 0 146.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light

If this light comes on and stays on,there is a problem with a system onthe vehicle that is causing theparking brake system to work at areduced level. The vehicle can stillbe driven, but should be taken to adealer as soon as possible. SeeElectric Parking Brake 0 221. If amessage displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), see BrakeSystem Messages 0 146.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.



If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light0 133 and Brake System Messages0 146.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 216.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light

This light is green if LKA is availableto assist.

LKA may assist by gently turningthe steering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thatdirection. The LKA light will turnamber.

This light is amber and flashes as aLane Departure Warning (LDW)alert, to indicate that the lanemarking has been crossed.

See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 248.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator willdisplay green when a vehicle isdetected ahead and amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 242.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by your



dealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the light is on and flashing, theTCS and/or the StabiliTrak systemis actively working.


Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.



If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light goes off.

Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Drivingwith this light on can damage theengine and it may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. SeeEngine Overheating 0 277.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating 0 277.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages 0 154.Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressure0 306.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 309.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.



This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 46.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 170.

IntelliBeam® Light

This light comes on when theIntelliBeam system, if equipped, isenabled.

See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 168.



Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls 0 168.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhen the cruise control is on andready, and turns green when thecruise control is set and active.

See Cruise Control 0 227.

Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light is white when the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC, if equipped) ison and ready, and turns green whenthe ACC is set and active. SeeAdaptive Cruise Control 0 229.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed. See Door AjarMessages 0 148.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC is displayed in theinstrument cluster. It shows thestatus of many vehicle systems.

y orz : Move SEL up or down togo to the previous or next selection.

S or T : Press to move betweenthe interactive display zones in thecluster. Press S to go back to theprevious menu.

SEL (Select) : Press to open amenu or select a menu item. Pressand hold to reset values on certainscreens.

DIC Information DisplayOptions

The info displays on the DIC can beturned on or off through theSettings menu.

1. Press SEL while viewing theSettings page in one of theinteractive display zones on thecluster.

2. Scroll to Info Pages andpress SEL.

3. Pressy orz to movethrough the list of possible infodisplays.

4. Press SEL while an item ishighlighted to select ordeselect that item. When anitem is selected, a checkmarkwill appear next to it.

DIC Information Displays

The following is the list of allpossible DIC information displays.Some of the information displaysmay not be available for yourparticular vehicle.

Trip 1 or Trip 2 and Average FuelEconomy : The Trip display showsthe current distance traveled, ineither kilometers (km) or miles (mi),since the trip odometer was lastreset. The trip odometer can bereset by pressing and holding SELwhile this display is active.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. This number reflects onlythe approximate average fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow, and will change as drivingconditions change. The AverageFuel Economy can be reset along



with the trip odometer by pressingand holding SEL while this displayis active.

Also shows if the Active FuelManagement is active and inV4 mode, or inactive and inV8 mode. See Active FuelManagement® 0 209.

Fuel Range : Shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.LOW will be displayed when thevehicle is low on fuel. The fuelrange estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy :Shows the current fuel economy ineither liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg).This number reflects only theapproximate fuel economy that thevehicle has right now and changesfrequently as driving conditionschange.

Average Speed : Shows theaverage speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressing andholding SEL while this display isactive.

Timer : This display can be used asa timer. To start the timer, press SELwhile this display is active. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset. To stop the timer, pressSEL briefly while this display isactive and the timer is running. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SEL while this display is active.

Turn Arrow : Shows the nextmaneuver when using routeguidance.

Estimated Time to Arrival : Showsthe estimated time until arrival atyour destination.

Distance to Destination : Showsthe distance to the destination whenusing route guidance.

Speed Limit : Shows the currentspeed limit. The information for thispage comes from a roadwaydatabase.

Speed Warning : Allows the driverto set a speed that they do not wantto exceed. To set the SpeedWarning, press SEL when SpeedWarning is displayed. Pressy orz to adjust the value. This featurecan be turned off by pressing andholding SEL while viewing thispage. If the selected speed limit isexceeded, a pop-up warning isdisplayed and a chime may sound.

Cruise Set Speed : Shows thespeed the cruise control or AdaptiveCruise Control is set to.

Follow Distance Indicator : WhenAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) isnot engaged, the current follow timeto the vehicle ahead is displayed asa time value on this page. WhenACC has been engaged, the displayswitches to the gap setting page.This page shows the current gapsetting along with the vehicle aheadindicator.



Battery Voltage : Shows thecurrent battery voltage.

Oil Life : Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages 0 149.The oil should be changed as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 269.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 348.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will notreset itself. Do not reset the Oil Lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,press and hold SEL for several

seconds while the Oil Life display isactive. See Engine Oil Life System0 271.

Oil Pressure : Shows the engine oilpressure in kPa (kilopascals)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Engine Hours : Shows the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.

Transmission FluidTemperature : Shows thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid in either degreesCelsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

Tire Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all fourtires. Tire pressure is displayed ineither kilopascal (kPa) or in poundsper square inch (psi). If the pressureis low, the value for that tire isshown in amber. See Tire PressureMonitor System 0 308 and TirePressure Monitor Operation 0 309.

Blank Page : Allows for noinformation to be displayed in thecluster info display areas.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with HUD, someinformation concerning theoperation of the vehicle is projectedonto the windshield. The image isprojected through the HUD lens ontop of the instrument panel. Theinformation appears as an imagefocused out toward the front of thevehicle.



Caution

If you try to use the HUD imageas a parking aid, you maymisjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayedin either English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement is changed throughthe instrument cluster. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157 and “ClusterSettings Menu” under InstrumentCluster 0 125.

HUD Display on the VehicleWindshield

The HUD may display some of thefollowing vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts:

. Speed

. Tachometer

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Collision Alert

. Cruise Control

. Lane Departure

. Low Fuel

Some vehicle messages or alertsdisplayed in the HUD may becleared by using the steering wheelcontrols. See Vehicle Messages0 146.

Some information shown may notbe available on your vehicle if it isnot equipped with these features.

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Use the following settings toadjust the HUD.



$ (Image Adjustment) : Pressdown or lift up to center the HUDimage. The HUD image can only beadjusted up and down, not sideto side.

! (Display View) : Press toselect the display view. Each presswill change the display view.

D (Image Brightness) : Lift upand hold to brighten the display.Press down and hold to dim thedisplay. Hold down to turn thedisplay off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUDbrightness control can also beadjusted as needed.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angle andposition of the sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

HUD Views

There are four views in the HUD.Some vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts may bedisplayed in any view.

Metric

English

Speed View : This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), speed limit, AdaptiveCruise Control speed, LaneDeparture Warning, and vehicleahead indicator. Some informationonly appears on vehicles that havethese features, and when they areactive.

Metric

English

Audio/Phone View : This displaysthe speed view along with audio/phone information. The current radiostation, media type, and incomingcalls will be displayed.

All HUD views may briefly displayaudio information when the driveruses the steering wheel controls toadjust the audio settings appearingin the instrument cluster.

Incoming phone calls appearing inthe instrument cluster may alsodisplay in any HUD view.



Metric

English

Navigation View : This displays thespeed view along with Turn-by-TurnNavigation information. Thecompass heading is displayed whennavigation routing is not active.

Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alertsshown in the instrument cluster mayalso be displayed in any HUD view.

Metric

English

Performance View : This displaysthe speedometer reading, rpmreading, transmission positions, andgear shift indicator.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshield toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity ofthe HUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipethe lens gently, then dry it.

HUD Troubleshooting

Check that:

. Nothing is covering theHUD lens.

. HUD brightness setting is nottoo dim or too bright.

. HUD is adjusted to the properheight.

. Polarized sunglasses arenot worn.

. Windshield and HUD lens areclean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See WindshieldReplacement 0 286.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SEL. The messages thatrequire immediate action cannot becleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

The following are some of thevehicle messages that may bedisplayed depending on the vehiclecontent.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Battery -North America 0 282.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

TRANSPORT MODE ON

This message is displayed when thevehicle is in transport mode. Somefeatures can be disabled while inthis mode, including RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE), remote start,and the vehicle alarm system. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for serviceto turn transport mode off.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid 0 281.

BRAKES OVERHEATED

This message is displayed when thebrakes are becoming overheated.This may be seen when driving onhills. Shift to a lower gear.



STEP ON BRAKE TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

This message is displayed if youattempt to release the ElectricParking Brake without the brakepedal applied. See Electric ParkingBrake 0 221.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed if theElectric Parking Brake is on whilethe vehicle is in motion. See ElectricParking Brake 0 221.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. Thebrake boost assist motor may beheard and brake pedal pulsationmay be felt. This is normal underthese conditions. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the parkingbrake. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Compass MessagesThe compass display will be blank ifthe vehicle temporarily losescommunication with the GlobalPositioning System (GPS).

Cruise Control Messages

ADAPTIVE CRUISE SETTO XXX

This message displays when theAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)speed is set. See Adaptive CruiseControl 0 229.

ADAPTIVE CRUISETEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) when it istemporarily unavailable. The ACCsystem does not need service.

This can occur under the followingconditions:

. The radar is not clean. Keep theradar sensors free of mud, dirt,snow, ice, and slush. Clean theentire front and/or rear of the

vehicle. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Care0 337.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith the radar object detection orcamera performance.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control speed is set. SeeCruise Control 0 227.

NO CRUISE BRAKING GASPEDAL APPLIED

This message displays whenAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) isactive and the driver is pressing thegas pedal. When this occurs, ACCwill not brake. See Adaptive CruiseControl 0 229.

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL

This message displays when theAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)needs service. Take the vehicle toyour dealer.



SHIFT TO PARK BEFOREEXITING

This message may display ifAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) isengaged holding the vehicle at astop, and the driver attempts to exitthe vehicle. Put the vehicle inP (Park) before exiting.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

A door open symbol will bedisplayed on the DIC showing whichdoor is open. If the vehicle has beenshifted out of P (Park), a DOOROPEN message will also bedisplayed. The DOOR OPENmessage may also be displayed ifthe vehicle starts to move. Close thedoor completely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display along witha hood open symbol when the hoodis open. Close the hood completely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display along witha symbol when the trunk is open.Close the trunk completely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge 0 128. To avoid added strainon a hot engine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. You can continue to drive yourvehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge 0 128.

When towing, use Tow/Haul Modeto prevent damage to the engine ortransmission. See Tow/Haul Mode0 216.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the engine coolingsystem reaches unsafetemperatures for operation. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as itis safe to do so to avoid severedamage. This message clears whenthe engine has cooled to a safeoperating temperature.



Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil Life System 0 271, DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 140,Engine Oil 0 269, and MaintenanceSchedule 0 348.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil 0 269.

OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE KEY WASDETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE

This message displays when tryingto start the vehicle if an RKEtransmitter is not detected. Thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.



NO REMOTE DETECTEDPRESS BRAKE TO RESTART

This message displays whenattempting to turn off the vehicleand the RKE transmitter is no longerdetected. Restarting is allowedwithout the RKE transmitter forfive minutes. Press the brake pedalto restart the vehicle.

NUMBER OF KEYSPROGRAMMED

This message displays whenprogramming new keys to thevehicle.

REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE

This message displays whenleaving the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter still inside.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the RKE transmitter needsto be replaced.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROLON/OFF

This message is displayed when theexterior lamp control is in AUTO andthe lights have turned on or off. SeeAutomatic Headlamp System 0 171.

XXX TURN INDICATORFAILURE

When one of the turn signals is out,this message displays to showwhich bulb needs to be replaced.See Bulb Replacement 0 287 andReplacement Bulbs 0 288.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.

Object Detection SystemMessages

24 GHz RADARS OFF

This message displays when drivingin certain areas where there may beradar interference. Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC), Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), and the FrontAutomatic Braking (FAB) Systemmay not work or may not work aswell. The vehicle does not needservice.

AUTOMATIC COLLISIONPREP OFF

This message displays when theFront Automatic Braking (FAB)System has been turned off. SeeFront Automatic Braking (FAB)System 0 244.

AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREPREDUCED

This message displays when theFront Automatic Braking (FAB)System has been set to the Alertsetting. This setting disables mostFAB functions. Some last-secondautomatic braking capability is stillprovided with the Alert setting, butbraking is less likely to occur. SeeFront Automatic Braking (FAB)System 0 244.



AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREPUNAVAILABLE

This message displays when theFront Automatic Braking (FAB)System has been unavailable forsome time. The FAB System doesnot need service. This message candisplay under the followingconditions:

. The front of the vehicle orwindshield is not clean. Keepthese areas clean and free ofmud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush.For cleaning instructions, seeExterior Care 0 337.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith the object detectionperformance.

This message may also bedisplayed if there is a problem withthe StabiliTrak system. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 224.

FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

This message displays when theForward Collision Alert (FCA) hasbeen turned off.

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKEDCLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when thecamera is blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue. The Lane Keep Assist (LKA)and the Lane Departure Warning(LDW) system will not operate.Forward Collision Alert (FCA) maynot work or may not work as well.

LANE CHANGE ALERT OFF

This message indicates that thedriver has turned the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) and LaneChange Alert (LCA) systems off.

LANE KEEPING ASSISTUNAVAILABLE

This message displays when theLane Keep Assist (LKA) and LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) system istemporarily unavailable. The LKAsystem does not need service.

This message could be due to thecamera being blocked. Clean theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror.

REAR AUTO BRAKE/PARKASSIST OFF

This message displays when theParking Assist system has beenturned off or when there is atemporary condition causing thesystem to be disabled.

REAR AUTO BRAKE ANDPARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate the parkingand backing features of the DriverAssistance System when they aretemporarily unavailable. The systemdoes not need service.



This can occur under the followingconditions:

. The radar is not clean. Keep theradar sensors free of mud, dirt,snow, ice, and slush. Clean theentire front and/or rear of thevehicle. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Care0 337.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith the radar object detection orcamera performance.

See Driver Assistance Systems0 236.

SERVICE AUTOMATICCOLLISION PREP

If this message displays, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem. Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC), Forward Collision Alert(FCA), and/or the Front AutomaticBraking (FAB) System may notwork. Do not use these systemsuntil the vehicle has been repaired.

SERVICE DRIVER ASSISTSYSTEM

If this message displays, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),Forward Collision Alert (FCA), FrontAutomatic Braking (FAB) System,Assistance Systems for Parking orBacking, and/or Lane Keep Assist(LKA) system may not work. Do notuse these systems until the vehiclehas been repaired.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Do not use the Lane KeepAssist (LKA), Lane DepartureWarning (LDW), Front AutomaticBraking (FAB), and ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) features. Takethe vehicle to your dealer.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Parking Assistsystem. Do not use this system tohelp you park. See your dealer forservice.

SERVICE REAR AUTO BRAKEAND PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the parking andbacking features of the DriverAssistance System. Do not use thissystem to help park or back thevehicle. See your dealer for service.

SERVICE SIDE DETECTIONSYSTEM

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA), Lane Change Alert (LCA),and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)features will not work. Take thevehicle to your dealer.



SIDE DETECTION SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

This message indicates that SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA), LaneChange Alert (LCA), and RearCross Traffic Alert (RCTA) aredisabled either because the sensoris blocked and cannot detectvehicles in the blind zone, or thevehicle is passing through an openarea, such as the desert, wherethere is insufficient data foroperation. This message may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due toroad spray. The vehicle does notneed service. For cleaning, see"Washing the Vehicle" underExterior Care 0 337.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE LEVELING SYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the automatic rearlevel control. See Automatic LevelControl 0 226. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 224.

SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the Magnetic RideControl system. See Magnetic RideControl 0 226. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 224.

SPORT MODE ON

This message displays when theSport Mode is on. See MagneticRide Control 0 226.

TOUR MODE ON

This message displays when theTour Mode is on. See Magnetic RideControl 0 226.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned off. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 224.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned on. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 224.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system. Seeyour dealer for service.



Safety Belt Messages

AUTOMATIC SEATBELTTIGHTENING UNAVAILABLE

This message displays when theAutomatic Safety Belt TighteningSystem, if equipped, becomesunavailable. This could be causedby a temporary condition. If themessage continues to display, seeyour dealer.

SERVICE AUTOMATICSEATBELT TIGHTENINGSYSTEM

If this message displays, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair theAutomatic Safety Belt TighteningSystem, if equipped.

Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Steering SystemMessages

STEERING ASSIST ISREDUCED DRIVE WITH CARE

This message may display if aproblem occurs with the electricpower steering system. If thismessage appears, steering effortmay be slightly higher than normal.The vehicle is still safe to drive. Usecaution while in reduced assistmode. If this message is persistentor appears repeatedly, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Steering 0 189.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays when thereis a problem with electric powersteering. If this message displaysand a reduction in steering

performance or loss of powersteering assistance is noticed, seeyour dealer. See Steering 0 189.

Starting the VehicleMessages

PRESS BRAKE TO START

This message is displayed whenattempting to start the vehiclewithout first pressing the brakepedal.

SERVICE KEYLESS STARTSYSTEM

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the pushbutton startsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation 0 309.



TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation0 309.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

This message displays when thepressure in one or more of the tiresis low.

This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light 0 137.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tires0 299, Vehicle Load Limits 0 198,and Tire Pressure 0 306.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. TheDIC also shows the tire pressurevalues. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 140.

Transmission Messages

4WD OFF

If equipped with four-wheel drive,this message displays when thefour-wheel-drive system istemporarily disabled due to anoverheated condition. The vehiclewill run in two-wheel drive when thismessage is present. Once thefour-wheel-drive system cools down,the message turns off and thefour-wheel-drive system returns tonormal operation.

4WD SHIFT IN PROGRESS

This message will display while thefour-wheel-drive system is shifting.

FOR 4WD LOW SHIFT TONEUTRAL

If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n isrequested, and the vehicle speed iscorrect, but the transmission is not

in N (Neutral), this message willdisplay until the transmission isshifted to N (Neutral).

FOR 4WD LOW SLOW TO XXX

If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n isrequested, but the vehicle speed istoo high, this message will displayuntil the correct vehicle speed isreached.

GRADE BRAKING ACTIVE

This message displays when gradebraking has been activated whiledriving on downhill grades. Thismessage will only appear the firsttime the feature is activated in anignition cycle. See Tow/Haul Mode0 216, Automatic Transmission0 211, and Cruise Control 0 227.

GRADE BRAKING OFF

This message displays when gradebraking has been disabled with theTow/Haul Mode button on the end ofthe shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode0 216, Automatic Transmission0 211, and Cruise Control 0 227.



GRADE BRAKING ON

This message displays when gradebraking has been enabled with theTow/Haul Mode button on the end ofthe shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode0 216, Automatic Transmission0 211, and Cruise Control 0 227.

SERVICE 4WD

If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,this message may display if aproblem occurs with thefour-wheel-drive system. If thismessage appears, stop as soon aspossible and turn off the vehicle.Turn the vehicle off for at leastone minute, then restart the vehicleand check for the message on theDIC display. If the message is stilldisplayed or appears again whenyou begin driving, thefour-wheel-drive system needsservice. See your dealer.

SHIFT DENIED

This message displays when theshift lever is in M (Manual Mode)and a transmission range has beenselected that is unavailable at thecurrent vehicle speed.

TO EXIT 4WD LOW SHIFT TONEUTRAL

If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n isrequested, and the vehicle speed iscorrect, but the transmission is notin N (Neutral), this message willdisplay until the transmission isshifted to N (Neutral).

TO EXIT 4WD LOW SLOWTO XXX

If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n isrequested, but the vehicle speed istoo high, this message will displayuntil the correct vehicle speed isreached.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the transmission fluidin the vehicle gets hot. Driving withthe transmission fluid temperaturehigh can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let itidle to allow the transmission tocool. This message clears and thechime stops when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

When towing, use Tow/Haul Modeto prevent damage to the engine ortransmission. See Tow/Haul Mode0 216.

VEHICLE IN 4WD LOW

This message will display if thevehicle is driven in 4 n for about10 minutes above 72 km/h (45 mph).

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SELECTED SPEED LIMITEXCEEDED

This message is displayed when thevehicle speed is greater than the setspeed. See "Speed Warning" underDriver Information Center (DIC)0 140.



Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message may display when thewasher fluid level is low. Fill thewindshield washer reservoir as soonas possible. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 268 forthe location of the windshieldwasher reservoir. Also, see WasherFluid 0 279.

Window Messages

OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/PASSENGER WINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to program each front windowfor the express-up feature to work.See Power Windows 0 50.

VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Audio System Controls

1. Press the desired feature todisplay a list of availableoptions.

2. Press to select the desiredfeature setting.

3. Press S Back to return to theprevious menu or exit.

Press SETTINGS from the HomePage on the infotainment systemdisplay.

Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:

. Time and Date

. Language (Language)

. Valet Mode

. Radio

. Vehicle

. Bluetooth

. Voice

. Display

. Rear Camera

. Return to Factory Settings

. Software Information

Detailed information for each menufollows.

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock 0 120.

Language (Language)

Select Language, then select fromthe available language(s).

The selected language will displayon the system, and voicerecognition will reflect the selectedlanguage.



Valet Mode (If Equipped)

This will lock the infotainmentsystem and steering wheel controls.It may also limit access to vehiclestorage locations (if equipped).

To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Select Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Press LOCK or UNLOCK to lock orunlock the system. Press Back to goback to the previous menu.

Radio

Press to display the Radio menuand the following may display:

. Manage Favorites

. Number of Favorites Shown

. Audible Touch Feedback

. Bose AudioPilot

. Auto Volume

. Maximum Startup Volume

. Audio Cue Volume

Manage Favorites

This allows favorites to be edited.See “Manage Favorites” in“Settings” under “Radio” in theinfotainment manual.

Number of Favorites Shown

Press to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number or selectAuto and the infotainment systemwill automatically adjust the numberof favorites shown.

Audible Touch Feedback

This allows Audible TouchFeedback to be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Bose AudioPilot

This allows Bose AudioPilot to beturned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volumebased on vehicle speed andambient noise.

Select Off, Low, Medium-Low,Medium, Medium-High, or High.

Maximum Startup Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greaterthan this level, the volume isadjusted to this level. To set themaximum startup volume, press +or − to increase or decrease.

Audio Cue Volume

This feature sets the volume ofaudio files played at system startupand shutdown.

Select On, then press + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Vehicle

Select and the following maydisplay:

. Climate and Air Quality

. Collision/Detection Systems

. Comfort and Convenience

. Lighting

. Power Door Locks



. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following may display:

. Auto Fan Max Speed

. Auto Heated Seats

. Auto Defog

. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Max Speed

This feature will set the maximumauto fan speed.

Select Low, Medium, or High.

Auto Heated Seats

When the vehicle is on, this featurewill automatically activate theheated seats at the level required bythe vehicle's interior temperature.See “Auto Heated Seats” under“Climate Control” in Dual AutomaticClimate Control System 0 178.

Select Off or On.

Auto Defog

When set to On, the auto defogcomes on when the climate controldetects a humidity risk based onoutside temp, windshield temp, andinterior humidity. Air will be directedto the windshield.

Select Off or On.

Auto Rear Defog

If equipped, this feature willautomatically turn on the rearwindow defogger when it is coldoutside.

Select Off or On.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the followingmay display:

. Alert Type

. Auto Collision Preparation

. Go Notifier

. Park Assist

. Lane Change Alert

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Alert Type

This feature will set crash alerts tobeeps or seat vibrations. Thissetting affects all crash alertsincluding Forward Collision Alert,Lane Departure Warning, and ParkAssist alerts. See Driver AssistanceSystems 0 236.

Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.

Auto Collision Preparation

This feature will turn on or off theForward Collision Alert (FCA) andFront Automatic Braking (FAB). TheOff setting disables all FCA andFAB functions. With the Alert andBrake setting, both FCA and FABare available. The Alert settingdisables FAB, but some last-secondautomatic braking capability is stillprovided, though less likely to occur.See Front Automatic Braking (FAB)System 0 244.

Select Off, Alert and Brake, or Alert.

Go Notifier

This feature will give a reminder thatAdaptive Cruise Control provideswhen it has brought the vehicle to a



complete stop behind anotherstopping vehicle, and then thatvehicle drives on.

Select Off or On.

Park Assist

If equipped, this allows the featureto be turned on or off. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 237.

Select Off, On, or On with TowbarAttached.

Side Blind Zone Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) 0 245.

Select Off or On.

Lane Change Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Lane Change Alert(LCA) 0 246.

Select Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing may display:

. Auto Memory Recall

. Easy Exit Options

. Chime Volume

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Auto Mirror Folding

. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Auto Memory Recall

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Memory Seats 0 59.

Select On or Off.

Easy Exit Options

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Memory Seats 0 59.

Select On or Off.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press + or − to adjust the volume.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, the driver and/orpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.

Select Off, On - Driver andPassenger, On - Driver, or On -Passenger.

Auto Mirror Folding

When on, the outside rearviewmirrors will automatically fold orunfold when the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter Q or Kbutton is pressed and held.

Select Off or On.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

When on and the front wiper is on,the rear wiper will automaticallyactivate when the vehicle is shiftedto R (Reverse).

Select Off or On.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing may display:



. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlamps and allows some of theexterior lamps and most of theinterior lamps to turn on brieflywhen K on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressedto locate the vehicle.

Select On or Off.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60Seconds, or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may display:

. Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thevehicle is off, the driver door isopen, and locking is requested. Allthe doors will lock and only thedriver door will unlock. See LockoutProtection 0 38.

If Off is selected, the Delayed DoorLock menu will be available.

Select On or Off.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select On or Off.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Startand the following may display:

. Remote Unlock Light Feedback

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Remote Window Operation

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Select Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.



Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the cooled seats onwhen using remote start onwarm days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the heated seats onwhen using remote start oncold days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Window Operation

This allows the window to beopened when pressing K on theRKE transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

Select Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selectsfeedback. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 28.

Select Off, On with HornChirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle.

Select Off or On.

Bluetooth


. Pair New Device

. Device Management

. Ringtones

. Voice Mail Numbers

Pair New Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing” under “Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls)” in theinfotainment manual.

Device Management

Select to connect to a differentphone source, disconnect a phone,or delete a phone.

Ringtones

Press to change the ring tone forthe specific phone. The phone doesnot need to be connected to changethe ring tone.

Voice Mail Numbers

This feature displays the voice mailnumber for all connected phones.To change the voice mail number,select EDIT or press the EDITbutton. Type a new number, thenselect SAVE or press the SAVEbutton.



Voice


. Confidence Threshold

. Prompt Length

. Audio Feedback Speed

Confidence Threshold

This feature allows the adjustmentof the sensitivity of the speechrecognition system.

Select Short or Long.

Prompt Length

This feature adjusts the voiceprompt length.

Select Confirm More orConfirm Less.

Audio Feedback Speed

This feature adjusts the audiofeedback speed.

Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.

Display


. Mode

. Proximity Sensing

. Calibrate Touchscreen

. Turn Display Off

Mode

Select to change the display of theinfotainment system.

Select Auto, Day, or Night.

Proximity Sensing

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off.

Select Off, On, or On-Map Only.

Calibrate Touchscreen

Select to calibrate the touchscreen,then follow the prompts.

Turn Display Off

Select to turn the display off. Pressanywhere on the display area or anyfaceplate button to turn thedisplay on.

Rear Camera


. Guidance Lines

. Rear Park Assist Symbols

Guidance Lines

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 237.

Rear Park Assist Symbols

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 237.

Return to Factory Settings


. Restore Vehicle Settings

. Clear All Private Data

. Restore Radio Settings

Restore Vehicle Settings

This allows selection of restoringvehicle settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.



Clear All Private Data

This allows selection to clear allprivate information from the vehicle.

Select Delete or Cancel.

Restore Radio Settings

This allows selection to restoreradio settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Software Information

Select to view the infotainmentsystem current software information.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 373.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. These

instructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.



Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1to 3 in) away from theUniversal Remote systembuttons with the indicator lightin view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of the garagedoor opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one ofthe three Universal Remote

system buttons to be used tooperate the garage door. Donot release either button untilthe indicator light goes from aslow to a rapid flashing light.Then release both buttons.

Some garage door openersmay require substitution ofStep 2 with the procedureunder “Radio Signals forCanada and Some GateOperators” later in this section.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicatorlight and garage dooractivation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, thenprogramming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press may

be required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smartbutton inside the garage on thegarage door opener receiver.



The name and color of thebutton may vary bymanufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote systembutton for two seconds andthen release it. If the garagedoor does not move or thelamp on the garage dooropener receiver does not flash,press and hold the samebutton a second time fortwo seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does notmove or the garage door lampdoes not flash, press and holdthe same button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming help,call 1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This shouldtake about 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.



Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under“Programming the UniversalRemote System.”


168 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 168Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 172Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Battery Load Management . . . 175Battery Power Protection . . . . . 176

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

P (Off) : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol to the off position again willturn the automatic headlamps andDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works when thevehicle is shifted into the P (Park)position.

AUTO (Automatic) : Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; (Parking Lamps) : Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

2 (Headlamps) : Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps will turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before automaticallyturning off to prevent the batteryfrom being drained. Turn theheadlamp control to off and thenback to the headlamp on position tomake the headlamps stay on for anadditional 10 minutes.

IntelliBeam® System

If equipped, this system turns thevehicle's high-beam headlamps onand off according to surroundingtraffic conditions.


Lighting 169

The system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is darkenough and there is no other trafficpresent.

This light comes on in theinstrument cluster when theIntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and EnablingIntelliBeam

To enable the IntelliBeam system,with the turn signal lever in theneutral position, turn the exteriorlamp control to AUTO. The bluehigh-beam on light appears on theinstrument cluster when the highbeams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam

The system only activates the highbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

There is a sensor near the topcenter of the windshield, whichautomatically controls the system.Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

The high-beam headlamps remainon, under the automatic control,until one of the following situationsoccurs:

. The system detects anapproaching vehicle'sheadlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is brightenough that high-beamheadlamps are not required.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).

. The turn signal lever is movedforward to the high-beamposition or the Flash-to-Passfeature is used. See HeadlampHigh/Low-Beam Changer 0 170and Flash-to-Pass 0 170.

. The IntelliBeam system isdisabled by the high/low-beamchanger or the Flash-to-Passfeature. If this happens, the high/low-beam changer must beactivated two times withinfive seconds to reactivate theIntelliBeam system. Theinstrument cluster light will comeon to indicate the IntelliBeam isreactivated. See HeadlampHigh/Low-Beam Changer 0 170and Flash-to-Pass 0 170.

The high beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect other vehicle's lampsbecause of any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps aremissing, damaged, obstructedfrom view, or otherwiseundetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannotbe detected due to denseexhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist, or other airborneobstructions.


170 Lighting

. The vehicle's windshield is dirty,cracked, or obstructed bysomething that blocks the viewof the light sensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such thatthe front end points upward,causing the light sensor to aimhigh and not detect headlampsand taillamps.

. The vehicle is being driven onwinding or hilly roads.

The automatic high-beamheadlamps may need to be disabledif any of the above conditions exist.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turnedon and the ignition is off. To turn offthe chime, turn the exterior lampcontrol to off or AUTO and thenback on, or close and re-open thedoor. In the AUTO mode, theheadlamps turn off once the ignitionis off or remain on until the

headlamp delay ends (if enabled inthe DIC). See “Exit Lighting” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer$ (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger) : Push the turn signallever toward the instrument panel tochange the headlamps from low tohigh beam.

Pull the turn signal lever toward youand release it to return to low-beamheadlamps.

When the high-beam headlamps areon, this indicator light on theinstrument cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. They will stay on as long as youhold the lever toward you. Thehigh-beam indicator on theinstrument cluster will come on.Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:


Lighting 171

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The transmission is not inP (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL system is on, onlythe DRL are on. The taillamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will notbe on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to the off position andthen release. For vehicles first soldin Canada, off will only work whenthe vehicle is in P (Park).

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turnson the headlamps at the normal

brightness, along with the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, and theinstrument panel lights. The radiolights will also be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampcontrol toP and then release it.

The vehicle has a light sensor onthe top of the instrument panel thatcontrols the automatic headlampsystem. Do not cover the sensor,otherwise the headlamps may comeon when they are not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage, heavy overcastweather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the automaticheadlamp system so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The automatic headlampsystem is only affected when thelight sensor detects a change inlighting lasting longer than thedelay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem will come on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately one minutefor the automatic headlamp systemto change if it is bright enoughoutside. During that delay, theinstrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 173.


172 Lighting

To idle the vehicle with theautomatic headlamp system off, turnthe control to the off position.

The headlamps will also stay onafter you exit the vehicle.

The regular headlamp system canbe turned on when needed.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers) :Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. Press again to turn theflashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Move the turn signal lever all theway up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for lessthan one second until the arrowstarts to flash to signal a lanechange. This causes the turnsignals to automatically flash threetimes. It will flash six times if Tow/Haul Mode is active. Holding theturn signal lever for more thanone second will cause the turnsignals to flash until the lever isreleased.


Lighting 173

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb couldbe burned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check thefuse. See Fuses 0 289.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal. The message TURNSIGNAL ON will also appear in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Toturn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Cornering LampsFor vehicles equipped withcornering lamps, they automaticallycome on when all of the followingoccur:

. The low-beam headlampsare on.

. The turn signals are activated orthe steering wheel is at acalibrated angle.

. The vehicle speed is below thecalibrated speed.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel lights and isnext to the exterior lamp control.

D (Instrument PanelIllumination) : Move thethumbwheel up or down to brightenor dim the lights.


174 Lighting

Dome Lamps

There are dome lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position, or usingRetained Accessory Power (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.


Lighting 175

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and the interiorlamps turn on briefly at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when Kis pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. When adoor is opened, the interior lampscome on if the dome lamp control isin the DOOR position. After about30 seconds the exterior lamps turnoff. Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing the RKE transmitter Qbutton.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps and interiorlamps come on at night, or in areaswith limited lighting, when the driverdoor is opened after the ignition isturned off. The exterior lamps and

interior lamps remain on for a setamount of time, then automaticallyturn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), whichestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. The voltmetergauge or the voltage display on theDriver Information Center (DIC),if equipped, may show the voltage

moving up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.


176 Lighting

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed and it is recommendedthat the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages 0 146.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome andreading lamps if they are left on formore than 10 minutes when theignition is off. This will keep thebattery from running down.


Infotainment System 177

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.


178 Climate Controls

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Climate ControlSystems

Dual Automatic ClimateControl SystemThe climate control buttons and thetouch screen are used to adjust theheating, cooling, and ventilation.

Climate Control Buttons


2. Fan Control

3. OFF (Fan)

4. Driver and Passenger Heatedand Cooled Seats (If Equipped)

5. Recirculation

6. Rear Window Defogger

7. Defrost


Climate Touch Screen Controls



3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)


Climate Controls 179

6. Climate Control Selection(Application Tray Button)

7. Rear (Rear Climate ControlTouch Screen)


Climate Control Touch Screen

The fan, air delivery mode, airconditioning, driver and passengertemperatures, and SYNC settingscan be controlled by pressingCLIMATE on the infotainment homescreen or the climate button in thetouch screen application tray.A selection can then be made onthe front climate control pagedisplayed. See the infotainmentmanual.

Climate Control Status Screen

The climate control status screenappears briefly when the climatecontrol buttons on the faceplate areadjusted. The air delivery mode canbe adjusted on the climate controlstatus screen.

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on orAUTO is displayed on the touchscreen, the system is in full

automatic operation. If the airdelivery mode or fan setting ismanually adjusted, the autoindicator turns off and the displaywill show the selected settings. Autooperation can be turned offindividually for climate settings.

For automatic operation:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. Press@ toselect recirculation; press it again toselect outside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the instrumentcluster. See “Cluster Settings Menu”under Instrument Cluster 0 125.



OFF (Fan) : Press the OFF buttonto turn the fan on or off. Thetemperature control and air deliverymode can still be adjusted with thefan off.

w /x (Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls) : Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver and thepassenger. Press to increase ordecrease the temperature. Pressand hold to rapidly increase ordecrease the temperature.

The driver and passengertemperatures can also be adjustedby pressing the controls on thetouch screen.

SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature) : Press SYNC on thetouch screen to link all climate zonesettings to the driver settings. Adjustthe driver side temperature controlto change the linked temperature.When the passenger settings areadjusted, the SYNC button isdisplayed when the temperaturesare unlinked.

Rear (If Equipped) : Press thisbutton on the front climate controltouch screen to open the rearclimate control screen. The rearclimate control settings can now beadjusted from the frontpassenger area.

Manual Operation

z9y(Fan Control) : Press thefan control buttons or the touchscreen fan control, to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Press andhold the buttons or the touch screencontrol to adjust speed morequickly. The fan speed settingdisplays. Pressing either buttoncancels automatic fan control andthe fan can be controlled manually.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation. To turn off the fan andclimate control system, press theOFF button.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Whenthe climate information is displayed,press the desired air delivery modeon the touch screen to change thedirection of the airflow. The selectedair delivery mode button is lit.Pressing any of the air delivery

buttons cancels automatic airdelivery control and the direction ofthe airflow can be controlledmanually. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y (Vent) : Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level) : Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

[ (Floor) : Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

- (Defog) : Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 (Defrost) : Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield. Press the0 button toturn on or off. Changing the airdelivery mode also turns thedefrost off.

A/C Mode (Air Conditioning) :Press the AC Mode touch screencontrol to turn the automatic air



conditioning on or off. If the fan isturned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioner will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed.

Automatic Air Recirculation :When the AUTO indicator light ison, the air is automaticallyrecirculated as needed to helpquickly cool the inside of thevehicle.

The climate control system mayhave a sensor to detect air pollution.When using automatic airrecirculation, the air quality controlsystem may operate. To adjust thesensitivity of the air quality sensor,see “Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

@ (Recirculation) : Press toalternate between recirculating airinside the vehicle or pulling inoutside air. The indicator light on thebutton is lit when recirculation modeis active. This helps to quickly coolthe air inside the vehicle and reducethe entry of outside air and odors.

Pressing this button cancelsautomatic recirculation. Press AUTOto return to automatic operation;recirculation runs automatically asneeded.

Manual recirculation mode is notavailable when in Defrost or Defogmodes.

Auto Defog : The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization0 157.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger) :Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The defogger turns off if theignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.

The heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger button is on and help toclear fog or frost from the surface ofthe mirrors.

Caution

Do not try to clear frost or othermaterial from the inside of thefront windshield and rear windowwith a razor blade or anythingelse that is sharp. This maydamage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect theradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Driver and Passenger Heated andCooled Seats (If Equipped) : PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.




Press C or { to cool the driver orpassenger seat. See Heated andCooled Front Seats 0 61.

The vehicle also has auto heatedseats that turn on when the vehicleis on. The seats will activate at thelevel required by the vehicle’sinterior temperature. To turn off,press J or z. The auto heatedseats can be turned on or off. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 157 andHeated and Cooled Front Seats0 61.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation : If equipped with theremote start feature, the climatecontrol system may run when thevehicle is started remotely. Thesystem uses the driver’s previoussettings to heat or cool the inside ofthe vehicle. The rear defog maycome on during remote start basedon cold ambient conditions. Therear defog indicator light does notcome on during a remote start.

If equipped with heated or cooledseats, they may come on during aremote start. See Remote VehicleStart 0 35 and Heated and CooledFront Seats 0 61.

Sensor

The solar sensor, on top of theinstrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.

Rear Climate ControlSystemIf equipped with a rear climatecontrol system, the settings can beadjusted with the rear climatecontrol buttons and the touchscreen on the center stack.

Rear Climate Control Buttons

1. Heated Rear Seats


3. Temperature Control



4. Fan Control

5. O (On/Off)


Rear Climate Touch ScreenControls


2. Rear Climate TemperatureControl

3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperatures)

5. REAR O (On/Off)

6. Rear AUTO (AutomaticOperation)

7. Front (Front Climate ControlTouch Screen)

8. Rear Control Lockout


Rear : Press this button on the frontclimate control touch screen to openthe rear climate control screen. Therear climate control settings cannow be adjusted from the frontpassenger area.

O (On/Off) : Press O or REAR O toturn the rear climate control on oroff. If the rear climate control isturned off using REAR O on the

touch screen, the O button and thetemperature or air delivery modebuttons on the rear climate controlfaceplate must be pressed withinfive seconds to turn it back on.

SYNC : Press SYNC on the touchscreen to match the rear climatecontrol temperature to the frontclimate control driver temperature.The SYNC button will be lit. Pressthe TEMP, MODE, or AUTO buttontwice to unlink the set driver andrear temperatures. The SYNCbutton turns off.

Rear Control Lockout : Press RearControl Lockout on the touch screento lock or unlock control of the rearclimate control system from the frontclimate control touch screen. Whenlocked the rear climate controlcannot be adjusted from the rearclimate control faceplate.

Automatic Operation

Rear AUTO : Press to turn on or off.The air delivery and fan speed arecontrolled automatically. The AUTOindicator appears on the display.If the Mode or fan control buttonsare manually adjusted, this cancelsthe automatic operation.

Manual Operation

SA T (Fan Control) : Pressbriefly or press and hold the rearclimate control buttons or touchscreen to increase or decrease theairflow. PressingA T when thesystem is off will turn the system on.The air delivery mode remains in itsprevious setting.

w /x (Temperature Control) :Press briefly or press and hold therear temperature control buttons or



touch screen to adjust the rearpassenger temperature. Presswfor warmer air and pressx forcooler air.

Y/\/Y (Air Delivery ModeControl) : Press the desired modebutton on the touch screen or theMODE button on the rear faceplateto change the direction of the airflowin the rear seating area.

M or L (Heated Rear Seats) :Press M or L to heat the left orright outboard seat cushion andseatback. See Heated Rear Seats0 62.

Air VentsAdjustable air vents are in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel.

1. Slider Knob

2. Thumbwheel

Move the slider knobs (1) to changethe direction of the airflow.

Use the thumbwheels (2) near theair vents to open or close off theairflow.

Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow,or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcould block the flow of air intothe vehicle.

. When you enter a vehicle in coldweather, press the fan up buttonto the maximum fan level beforedriving. This helps clear theintake ducts of snow andmoisture, and reduces thechance of fogging the inside ofthe window.

. Keep the air path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces the dust, pollen,and other airborne irritants fromoutside air that is pulled into thevehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule 0 348.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts 0 358.

1. Before opening the glove box,remove the two lower screws(out of view).

2. Open the glove box completelyand remove the two upperscrews.

3. Disconnect the electrical plugand remove the entireglove box.

4. Release the two tabs holdingthe service door. Open theservice door and remove theold filter.

5. Install the new air filter.

6. Close the service door andsecure the tabs.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstallthe glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.


186 Driving and Operating

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 188Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 189Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 195Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 196Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 197Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 202Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 205Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 209Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Active Fuel Management® . . . . 209

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 211Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . 221Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . 223

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . 226Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Automatic Level Control . . . . . . 226

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . 229

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . 236Assistance Systems forParking or Backing . . . . . . . . . . 237

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Front Automatic Braking (FAB)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . 246Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . 248

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 251Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253


Driving and Operating 187

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 262

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.



See the infotainment manual forinformation on that system or thenavigation system, if equipped,including pairing and using a cellphone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts0 69.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.



Steering

Electric Power Steering

This vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Steering SystemMessages 0 154. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.



3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.

The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingFour-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout four-wheel drive and

vehicles not equipped with AllTerrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)tires must not be driven off-roadexcept on a level, solid surface. Formore contact information about theoriginal equipment tires, see theLimited Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information manual.

One of the best ways for successfuloff-road driving is to control thespeed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear safety belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.



. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lowerair dam.

Caution

Operating the vehicle forextended periods without the frontfascia lower air dam installed cancause improper air flow to theengine. Re-attach the front fasciaair dam after off-road driving.

Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on theload floor can be tossedabout when driving overrough terrain. You or yourpassengers can be struckby flying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargoarea as far forward and aslow as possible. Theheaviest things should beon the floor, forward of therear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roofraise the vehicle's center ofgravity, making it more likelyto roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured ifthe vehicle rolls over. Putheavy loads inside thecargo area, not on the roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see If the Vehicle IsStuck 0 197 and Tires 0 299.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn 0 209.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause loss

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

of control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain aheadcannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.

When driving on hills:

. Use a low gear and keep a firmgrip on the steering wheel.

. Maintain a slow speed.

. When possible, drive straight upor down the hill.

. Slow down when approachingthe top of the hill.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident.There could be a drop-off,embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could beseriously injured or killed. As younear the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

{ Warning

If the vehicle has the two‐speedautomatic transfer case, shiftingthe transfer case to N (Neutral)can cause your vehicle to rolleven if the transmission is inP (Park). This is because theN (Neutral) position on the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

transfer case overrides thetransmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If leavingthe vehicle, set the parking brakeand shift the transmission toP (Park). Shift the transfer case toany position but N (Neutral).

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly when

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.

. If driving uphill when thevehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake.

The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot berestarted after stalling, set theparking brake, shift intoP (Park), and turn thevehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on the

downhill wheels, which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.



{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving in mud— the deeper the mud, the lowerthe gear. Keep the vehicle movingto avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive slowly through it. At fasterspeeds, water splashes and thevehicle can stall. When goingthrough water, the brakes get wetand it may take longer to stop. See“Driving on Wet Roads” later in thissection.



After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody orchassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. See the MaintenanceSchedule 0 348.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is

wet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 299.

. Turn off cruise control.



Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) whenfreezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 224.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops, but the brakesshould be applied sooner thanwhen on dry pavement. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS)0 220.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwise



clear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stay with the vehicle unless there ishelp nearby. If possible, useRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideService 0 366. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO), which

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

cannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and setthe fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 210.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See “Rocking the Vehicle to Get ItOut” later in this section.

The Traction Control System (TCS)can often help to free a stuckvehicle. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 224.If TCS cannot free the vehicle, see“Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out”following.



{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains 0 318.

Rocking the Vehicle to GetIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. For four-wheel-drivevehicles, shift into Four-Wheel DriveHigh. Turn the TCS off. Shift backand forth between R (Reverse) anda forward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directions

causes a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. SeeTowing the Vehicle 0 333.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The tire and loadinginformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (3) and the recommended

cold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires 0 299and Tire Pressure 0 306.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to



your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 256 forimportant information on towing atrailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs)

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs)

Example 2

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =136 kg (750 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined



weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to theB-pillar. The label may show thesize of the vehicle's original tiresand the inflation pressuresneeded to obtain the grossweight capacity of the vehicle.This is called Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). The

GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel,and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label mayalso show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on the front andrear axles, weigh the vehicle ata weigh station. Your dealer canhelp with this. Be sure to spreadthe load equally on both sides ofthe center line.

The warranty does not coverparts or components that failbecause of overloading.

The label will help determinehow much cargo and installedequipment the vehicle can carry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change theweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help load the vehicle properly.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carrysomething inside thevehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unless youneed to.



There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading theVehicle for Off-Road Driving”under Off-Road Driving 0 190.

Add-On Equipment

There may be a limit on howmany people can be inside thevehicle when carryingremovable items. Be sure toweigh the vehicle before buyingand installing the newequipment.

Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front orrear axle.

Automatic Level Control

See Automatic Level Control0 226.

If a weight-distributing hitch isbeing used, it is recommendedto allow the shocks to inflate,thereby leveling the vehicle priorto adjusting the height. See“Hitches” under TowingEquipment 0 260.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing0 256 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

The pedals can only be adjustedwhen the vehicle is in P (Park).

The switch used to adjust thepedals is on the center stack, to theleft of the touch screen.

Press the top of the switch to movethe pedals closer to your body.Press the bottom of the switch tomove the pedals away.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settingsbe saved and recalled. See MemorySeats 0 59.

Ignition Positions

Vehicles with Keyless Access havepushbutton starting.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.

The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the Keyless Accesssystem. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 28.



To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN and the brake pedal mustbe applied.

Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF (No Indicator Lights) : Whenthe vehicle is stopped, press theENGINE START/STOP button onceto turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 207.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Transmission Messages 0 155.When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willswitch to OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

The vehicle may have an electricsteering column lock. The lock isactivated when the vehicle isswitched to OFF and either frontdoor is opened. A sound may beheard as the lock actuates orreleases. The steering column lockmay not release with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,the vehicle may not start. Move thesteering wheel from left to rightwhile attempting to start the vehicle.If this does not work, the vehicleneeds service.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn theignition to OFF. On vehicleswith an automatic transmission,the shift lever must be inP (Park) to turn the ignitionswitch to the OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 221.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for longer thantwo seconds, or press twice infive seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light) : This mode allowssome electrical accessories to beused when the engine is off.



With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine 0 205. Theignition will then remain in ON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will place

the vehicle in Service Only Mode.The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Press thebutton again to turn the vehicle off.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 263.

Starting Procedure (KeylessAccess)

1. With the Keyless Accesssystem, the RKE transmittermust be in the vehicle. Pressthe ENGINE START/STOPbutton with the brake pedalapplied. When the enginebegins cranking, let go of thebutton.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it.

If the RKE transmitter is not inthe vehicle, if there isinterference, or the RKEbattery is low, the Driver



Information Center (DIC) willdisplay a message. See Keyand Lock Messages 0 149.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou press the ENGINE START/STOP button, for up to amaximum of 15 seconds. Waitat least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to allow the crankingmotor to cool down. When the

engine starts, let go of thebutton, and the accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the samething. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Donot race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18 °C (0 °F). Vehicleswith an engine heater should beplugged in at least four hours beforestarting. There may be an internalthermostat in the plug end of thecord, which will prevent enginecoolant heater operation attemperatures above −18 °C (0 °F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord is bythe left front fender, next to theengine compartment fuseblock.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detection

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

function. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operatingcondition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could makeit overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engineparts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The following vehicle accessoriescan be used for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off:

. Audio System

. Power Windows

. OnStar System (if equipped)

. Sunroof (if equipped)

. Accessory Power Outlets. Theconsole and center seat outletsare RAP powered.

These features work when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the ignition isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the windows and sunroof continueto work up to 10 minutes until anydoor is opened. The radio continuesto work for up to 10 minutes or untilthe driver door is opened.



Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If the vehicle has afour-wheel drive transfer casewith a N (Neutral) position, andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). Be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear. If towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 253.

1. Hold the brake pedal down,then set the parking brake.

See Parking Brake 0 221.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear— not inN (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — not inN (Neutral).

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. Youor others could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficult



to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park 0 208.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission. You will then beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release is designed toprevent movement of the shift leverout of P (Park), unless the ignition isin ON/RUN and the regular brakepedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 329.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel Management®

This system allows the engine tooperate on either all or half of itscylinders, depending on the drivingconditions.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.



Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 208 andEngine Exhaust 0 210.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 253.



AutomaticTransmissionIf equipped, there is an electronicshift lever position indicator withinthe instrument cluster. This displaycomes on when the ignition isturned to the ON/RUN position.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode 0 213.

P : This position locks the rearwheels. It is the best position to usewhen starting the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.When parked on a hill, especiallywhen the vehicle has a heavy load,you might notice an increase in theeffort to shift out of P (Park). See“Torque Lock” under Shifting IntoPark 0 208.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 208 andDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 253.

{ Warning

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll— evenif the shift lever is in P (Park)— ifthe transfer case is in N (Neutral).

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

So, be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear, Two-Wheel DriveHigh or Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low— not inN (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park0 208.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 197.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart when you are already



moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,use N (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D : This position is for normaldriving. It provides the best fueleconomy. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

. Going less than about 55 km/h(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Modewhen towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills,or driving off-road. Shift thetransmission to a lower gearselection if the transmission shiftstoo often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control 0 190.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapid

upshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. The adaptive shiftcontrol process continuallycompares key shift parameters topre-programmed ideal shifts storedin the transmission’s computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when thetemperature changes. During thisadaptive shift control process,



shifting might feel different as thetransmission determines the bestsettings.

When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed providing morestable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.

M : This position allows selection ofa range of gears appropriate forcurrent driving conditions.If equipped, see “Range SelectionMode” under Manual Mode 0 213.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

This mode is enabled when thevehicle is started, but is not enabledin Range Selection Mode. It assistsin maintaining desired vehiclespeeds when driving on downhillgrades by using the engine andtransmission to slow the vehicle.The first time the system engagesfor each ignition cycle, a DICmessage will be displayed. SeeTransmission Messages 0 155.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition cycle, press and hold theTow/Haul button for five seconds.When the button is released, therequested mode change is made.A DIC message displays. SeeTransmission Messages 0 155.

For other forms of grade braking,see Tow/Haul Mode 0 216 andCruise Control 0 227.

Kickdown Mode

The accelerator pedal provides anadditional downshift after pressingthrough the kickdown feature.

It requires extra pedal pressure nearthe end of its travel to engage.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speedwhile driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.



To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Tap the plus/minus buttons onthe shift lever to select thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions. Or,hold the plus/minus buttons toselect the highest or lowestrange available for the currentvehicle speed.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), anumber displays next to the M,indicating the current transmissionrange.

This number is the highest gear thatthe transmission will command whileoperating in M (Manual Mode). Allgears below that number are

available. As driving conditionschange, the transmission canautomatically shift to lower gears.For example, when 5 (Fifth) isselected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)gears are automatically shifted bythe transmission, but 6 (Sixth)cannot be used until the plus/minusbutton on the shift lever is used tochange to the range.

In vehicles with gasoline engines,when the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), adownshift may occur. The gear thatthe transmission is operating inwhen the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode)determines if a downshift occurs.See the following chart.



Gear beforeshifting from D(Drive) to M(Manual Mode)

8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range aftershifting fromD (Drive) toM (Manual Mode)– Tow/Haul notengaged

M6 M6 M5 M4 M3 M3 M2 M1

Range aftershifting fromD (Drive) toM (Manual Mode)– Tow/Haulengaged

M6 M5 M4 M3 M3 M3 M2 M1

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 216.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you are

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Low Traction Mode

Low Traction Mode assists invehicle acceleration when roadconditions are slippery, such as withice or snow. While the vehicle is at astop, select M2 using RangeSelection Mode. This will limittorque to the wheels and help toprevent the tires from spinning.



Tow/Haul Mode

The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling. This providesincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and enhanced transmissionand engine cooling when drivingdown steep hills or mountaingrades, towing, or hauling heavyloads.

The selector button is on the end ofthe shift lever. Turn the Tow/HaulMode on and off by pressing thebutton. When the Tow/Haul Mode isenabled, a light on the instrumentcluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 135 andHill and Mountain Roads 0 196.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment 0 260.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode 0 213.Tow/Haul Mode Grade Brakingassists in maintaining desiredvehicle speeds when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable or enable Tow/HaulGrade Braking within the currentignition cycle, press and hold theTow/Haul button for five seconds.When the button is released, therequested mode change is made.A DIC message is displayed. SeeTransmission Messages 0 155.

See Towing Equipment 0 260.

For other forms of grade braking,see Automatic Transmission 0 211and Cruise Control 0 227.



Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, four-wheel driveengages the front axle for extratraction. Read the appropriatesection for transfer case operationbefore using.

Caution

Do not drive on clean, dry

pavement in 4 m and 4 n (ifequipped) for an extended periodof time. These conditions maycause premature wear on thevehicle’s powertrain.

Driving on clean, dry pavement infour-wheel drive may:

. Cause a vibration to be felt inthe steering system.

. Cause tires to wear faster.

. Make the transfer case harder toshift, and cause it to run noisier.

{ Warning

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake0 221.

Caution

Extended high-speed operation in

4 n may damage or shorten thelife of the drivetrain.

Engagement noise and bump whenshifting between 4 n and 4 m or fromN (Neutral), with the engine running,is normal.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak® off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 224.

Two Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

Use the transfer case knob next tothe steering wheel to shift into andout of four-wheel drive.

Indicator lights display which settingthe transfer case is in. N (Neutral) isindicated on the knob. The indicatorlights will display briefly when theignition is turned on and one willstay on. If the lights displaymomentarily when the ignition is inON/RUN, but none stay on, theknob may have been turned whilethe vehicle was off. To see theindicator, turn the knob to another



position so that it matches theactual transfer case setting. If nolights display, take the vehicle toyour dealer for service. An indicatorlight flashes while shifting thetransfer case and remainsilluminated when the shift iscomplete.

If the transfer case cannot make arequested shift, it will return to thelast chosen setting. Turn the knobback to the previous transfer casesetting to see the indicator.

The settings are:

N (Neutral) : Use only when thevehicle needs to be towed. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 333or Towing the Vehicle 0 333.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Usefor driving on most streets andhighways. The front axle is notengaged. This setting provides thebest fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : Use when road surfacetraction conditions are variable.When driving in AUTO, the frontaxle is engaged, and the vehicle's

power is sent to the front and rearwheels automatically based ondriving conditions. This settingprovides slightly lower fuel economythan 2 m.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis position when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, whenoff-roading, or when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Thissetting engages the front axle anddelivers extra torque. Choose 4 nwhen driving off-road in deep sand,deep mud, or deep snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 224.

Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO

Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTOposition at any speed, except from 4n. The indicator light will flash whileshifting and will remain on when theshift is completed.

Shifting Into 2 m

Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed,except when shifting from 4 n. Theindicator light will flash while shiftingand will remain on when the shift iscompleted.

Shifting Into 4 n

When 4 n is engaged, keep vehiclespeed below 72 km/h (45 mph).

To shift into 4 n:1. The ignition must be in ON/

RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than5 km/h (3 mph) with thetransmission in N (Neutral). It isbest for the vehicle to bemoving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for

the 4 n indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.



Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 n indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift. After 30 seconds the transfercase will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob

to 4 m to display the indicator. Withthe vehicle moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph), and the transmission inN (Neutral), attempt the shift again.

Shifting Out of 4 nTo shift:

1. The vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmissionin N (Neutral) and the ignition inON/RUN. It is best for thevehicle to be moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO,or 2 m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO,or 2 m indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator lightwill flash for 30 seconds but will notcomplete the shift. With the vehiclemoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph),and the transmission in N (Neutral),attempt the shift again.

Shifting Into N (Neutral)

To shift:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelsurface.

2. Set the parking brake andpress and hold the brakepedal. See Parking Brake0 221.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition to ON/RUN.

4. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.6. Turn the transfer case knob

clockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least10 seconds. Then slowlyrelease the dial to the 4 nposition. The N (Neutral) lightwill come on when the transfercase shift to N (Neutral) iscomplete.

7. With the engine running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse),then shift the transmission toD (Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting the transmission.



8. Turn the engine off, and theignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park). SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing0 333.


Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift:

1. Set the parking brake andapply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn the transfer case knob tothe desired setting.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to thedesired gear.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 134.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking to

avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.



Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

Set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light0 133.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, a DIC

message will appear and a chimewill sound warning you that theparking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 253.

Electric Parking Brake

If equipped with an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB), the switch is to the leftof the steering wheel on theinstrument panel, below the exteriorlamp controls. The EPB can alwaysbe activated, even if the ignition is



off. To prevent draining the battery,avoid repeated cycles of the EPBwhen the engine is not running.

The system has a red parking brakestatus light and an amber parkingbrake warning light. See ElectricParking Brake Light 0 134 andService Electric Parking Brake Light0 134. There are also parkingbrake-related Driver InformationCenter (DIC) messages. See BrakeSystem Messages 0 146. In case ofinsufficient electrical power, the EPBcannot be applied or released.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe red parking brake status light toensure that the parking brake isapplied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at acomplete stop.

2. Lift up the EPB switchmomentarily.

The red parking brake status lightwill flash and then stay on once theEPB is fully applied. If the red

parking brake status light flashescontinuously, then the EPB is onlypartially applied or there is aproblem with the EPB. A DICmessage will display. Release theEPB and try to apply it again. If thelight does not come on, or keepsflashing, have the vehicle serviced.Do not drive the vehicle if the redparking brake status light is flashing.See your dealer. See ElectricParking Brake Light 0 134.

If the amber parking brake warninglight is on, lift up on the EPB switchand hold it up. Continue to hold theswitch until the red parking brakestatus light remains on. If the amberparking brake warning light is on,see your dealer.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is moving, the vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch isheld up. If the switch is held up untilthe vehicle comes to a stop, theEPB will remain applied.

The vehicle may automatically applythe EPB in some situations whenthe vehicle is not moving. This is

normal, and is done to periodicallycheck the correct operation of theEPB system.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB:

1. Place the ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START position.

2. Apply and hold the brakepedal.

3. Push down momentarily on theEPB switch.

The EPB is released when the redparking brake status light is off.

If the amber parking brake warninglight is on, release the EPB bypushing down on the EPB switchand holding it down. Continue tohold the switch until the red parkingbrake status light is off. If either lightstays on after release is attempted,see your dealer.



Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

If parking on a hill, or if the vehicleis pulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 253.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature isdesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses the

stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has an HSA feature,which may be useful when thevehicle is stopped on a gradesufficient enough to activate HSA.This feature is designed to preventthe vehicle from rolling, eitherforward or rearward, during vehicle

drive off. After the driver completelystops and holds the vehicle in acomplete standstill on a grade, HSAwill be automatically activated.During the transition period betweenwhen the driver releases the brakepedal and starts to accelerate todrive off on a grade, HSA holds thebraking pressure for a maximum oftwo seconds to ensure that there isno rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. It will notactivate if the vehicle is in a drivegear and facing downhill, or if thevehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse).



Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel spinand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses any of thedrive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of thevehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on the

intended path. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically whenthe vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) 0 262.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 197and “Turning the Systems Off andOn” later in this section.

When the transfer case (if equipped)is in Four-Wheel Drive Low, thestability system is automatically

disabled, g comes on, and theappropriate message will appear onthe DIC. Both traction control andStabiliTrak are automaticallydisabled in this condition.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC),and d comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver in



maintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.


Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrakis on the center stack.

Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease the g button. The traction

off light i displays in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate messagewill display in the DIC. See RideControl System Messages 0 153. Toturn TCS on again, press andrelease the g button. The traction

off light i displayed in theinstrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe g button is pressed, the systemwill not turn off until the wheels stopspinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the g button until

the traction off light i and the

StabiliTrak OFF light g come onand stay on in the instrument

cluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC. See Ride Control SystemMessages 0 153.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release the gbutton. The traction off light i and

the StabiliTrak OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turn off.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature and a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature. SeeTrailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 262 orHill Start Assist (HSA) 0 223.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 265.



Magnetic Ride ControlThe Magnetic Ride Control monitorsthe suspension system.

Based on road conditions, steeringwheel angle, and vehicle speed, thesystem automatically adjusts toprovide the best handling whileproviding a smooth ride. The Tourand Sport Modes will feel similar ona smooth road.

Tour : Use for normal city andhighway driving. This settingprovides a smooth, soft ride.

Sport : Use where road conditionsor personal preference demandmore control. This setting providesmore “feel,” or response to roadconditions.

The vehicle is normally in TourMode. Sport Mode is engaged whenthe Magnetic Ride Control button onthe center stack is pressed. Pressthe button again to return toTour Mode.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)briefly displays the appropriatemessage on vehicle startup or whena new mode is selected. See RideControl System Messages 0 153.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rearsuspension comes as a part of theMagnetic Ride Control system.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide a betterleveled riding position as well asbetter handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions.An air compressor connected to therear shocks will raise or lower therear of the vehicle to maintainproper vehicle height. The system isactivated when the ignition is in ON/RUN and will automatically adjustvehicle height thereafter. Thesystem may exhaust (lower vehicleheight) for up to 10 minutes after theignition has been turned off. You



may hear the air compressoroperating when the height is beingadjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch is beingused, it is recommended to allowthe shocks to inflate, leveling thevehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.

Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If equipped with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 40 km/h(25 mph).

If the Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control system begins tolimit wheel spin while using cruisecontrol, the cruise controlautomatically disengages.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 224. If a collisionalert occurs when cruise control isactivated, cruise control isdisengaged. See Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) System 0 242. Whenroad conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, the cruise control canbe turned back on.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

J (On/Off) : Press to turn thesystem on and off. A white indicatorappears in the instrument clusterwhen cruise is turned on.



+RES (Resume/Accelerate) : Ifthere is a set speed in memory,press the control up briefly toresume that speed or press andhold to accelerate. If the cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.

SET− (Set/Coast) : Press thecontrol down briefly to set the speedand activate cruise control. If thecruise control is already active, useto decrease vehicle speed.

* (Cancel) : Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If J is on when not in use, SET− or+RES could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep Joff when cruise is not being used.

To set cruise control:

1. Press J.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET− .

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

When the cruise control has beenset to the desired speed, a greencruise control indicator appears onthe instrument cluster and a cruiseset speed message appears on theDriver Information Center (DIC) andHead-Up Display (HUD),if equipped.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or* is pressed, thecruise control is disengaged withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press +RES up briefly. The vehiclereturns to the previous set speed.

Increasing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold +RES up untilthe vehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press +RESup briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 125.The increment value used dependson the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold SET− down untilthe desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, press SET−down briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.




Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.

While pressing the accelerator pedalor shortly following the release tooverride cruise, briefly applying theSET− control will result in cruise setto the current vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, the load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, pressing the accelerator pedalmay be necessary to maintainvehicle speed. When goingdownhill, Cruise Grade Brakinghelps maintain the driver selectedspeed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andcruise control is active. It is notenabled in Range Selection Mode.It assists in maintaining driver

selected speed when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable and enable Cruise GradeBraking for the current ignition keycycle, press and hold the Tow/Haulbutton for five seconds. A DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagedisplays. See TransmissionMessages 0 155.

For other forms of Grade Braking,see Automatic Transmission 0 211,and Tow/Haul Mode 0 216.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,press J.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if J ispressed or if the ignition isturned off.

Adaptive Cruise ControlIf equipped with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it allows the driver toselect the cruise control set speedand following gap. Read this entiresection before using this system.The following gap is the followingtime between your vehicle and avehicle detected directly ahead inyour path, moving in the samedirection. If no vehicle is detected inyour path, ACC works like regularcruise control. ACC uses cameraand radar sensors. See RadioFrequency Statement 0 373.

If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can accelerate or moderatelydecelerate to maintain the selectedfollowing gap. To disengage ACC,apply the brake. If ACC iscontrolling your vehicle speed whenthe traction control system (TCS) orelectronic stability control system



activates, the ACC mayautomatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 224. When roadconditions allow ACC to be safelyused, the ACC can be turnedback on.

ACC will not engage if the TCS orStabiliTrak electronic stability controlsystem is disabled.

{ Warning

ACC has limited braking abilityand may not have time to slowthe vehicle down enough to avoida collision with another vehicleyou are following. This can occurwhen vehicles suddenly slow orstop ahead, or enter your lane.Also see “Alerting the Driver” inthis section. Complete attention isalways required while driving andyou should be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving 0 188.

{ Warning

ACC will not detect or brake forchildren, pedestrians, animals,or other objects.

Do not use ACC when:

. On winding and hilly roadsor when the sensors areblocked by snow, ice, or dirt.The system may not detecta vehicle ahead. Keep theentire front of the vehicleclean.

. Visibility is low, such as infog, rain, or snowconditions. ACCperformance is limited underthese conditions.

. On slippery roads wherefast changes in tire tractioncan cause excessivewheel slip.

J (On/Off) : Press to turn thesystem on or off. The indicator turnswhite on the instrument clusterwhen ACC is turned on.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate) :Press the control up briefly toresume the previous set speed orhold upwards to accelerate. If ACCis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET– (Set/Coast) : Press thecontrol down briefly to set the speedand activate ACC. If ACC is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehiclespeed.



* (Cancel) : Press to disengageACC without erasing the selectedset speed.

[ (Follow Distance Gap) : Pressto select a following gap time (ordistance) setting for ACC of Far,Medium, or Near.

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control button off when cruiseis not being used.

Select the set speed desired forcruise. This is the vehicle speedwhen no vehicle is detected inits path.

ACC will not set at a speed lessthan 25 km/h (15 mph), although itcan be resumed when driving atlower speeds.

To set ACC:

1. Press J.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release the SET–control on the steering wheel.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle aheadis detected closer than the selectedfollowing gap.

The ACC indicator displays on theinstrument cluster and Head-UpDisplay (HUD). When ACC is active,the indicator will be lit green.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selectingthe set speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the ACC is set at a desired speedand then the brakes are applied,ACC is disengaged without erasingthe set speed from memory.

To begin using ACC again, press+RES up briefly on the steeringwheel. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed.

Increasing Speed While ACC is ata Set Speed

If ACC is already activated, do oneof the following:

. Use the accelerator to get to thehigher speed. Press SET– down.Release the control and theaccelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the higherspeed.

When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brakebecause it is overridden.A warning message will appearon the Driver Information Center(DIC) and Head-Up Display(HUD). See Cruise ControlMessages 0 147.

. Press and hold +RES up untilthe desired set speed appearson the display, then release it.



. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press +RESup. For each press, the vehiclegoes 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.

When it is determined there is novehicle ahead or the vehicle aheadis beyond the selected followinggap, the vehicle speed will increaseto the set speed.


Reducing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

If ACC is already activated, do oneof the following:

. Use the brake to get to thedesired lower speed. PressSET– down and release theaccelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the lowerspeed.

. Press and hold SET– down untilthe desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmaller increments, press SET−down. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1 km/h(1 mph) slower.


Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead within the selectedfollowing gap, ACC will adjust thevehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press[ on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Each presscycles the gap button through threesettings: Far, Medium, or Near.

When pressed, the current gapsetting displays briefly on the DICand HUD. The gap setting will bemaintained until it is changed.

Since each gap setting correspondsto a following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance will

vary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the furtherback your vehicle will follow avehicle detected ahead. Considertraffic and weather conditions whenselecting the following gap. Therange of selectable gaps may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alerttiming sensitivity (Far, Medium,or Near) for the Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) feature. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 242.

Alerting the Driver

If ACC is engaged, driver actionmay be required when ACC cannotapply sufficient braking whenapproaching a vehicle too rapidly.



When this condition occurs, thecollision alert symbol on the HUDwill flash on the windshield. Eithereight beeps will sound from thefront, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

See Defensive Driving 0 188.

Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead symbol is in theinstrument cluster and HUD display.

The vehicle ahead symbol onlydisplays when a vehicle is detectedin your vehicle’s path moving in thesame direction.

If this symbol is not displaying, ACCwill not respond to or brake tovehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle in front at theselected following gap. The vehiclespeed increases or decreases tofollow the vehicle in front of you, butwill not exceed the set speed. It mayapply limited braking, if necessary.When braking is active, the brakelights will come on. The automaticbraking may feel or sound differentthan if the brakes were appliedmanually. This is normal.

Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ Warning

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem may not brake for avehicle it has never detectedmoving. This can occur instop-and-go traffic or when avehicle suddenly appears due toa vehicle ahead changing lanes.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Your vehicle may not stop andcould cause a crash. Use cautionwhen using ACC. Your completeattention is always required whiledriving and you should be readyto take action and apply thebrakes.

ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengageand the driver will need to manuallyapply the brakes to slow thevehicle when:

. The sensors are blocked.

. The Traction Control System(TCS) or electronic stabilitycontrol system has activated orbeen disabled.

. No traffic or other objects arebeing detected.

. There is a fault in the system.

The ACC active symbol will not bedisplayed when ACC is no longeractive.



Notification to Resume ACC

ACC will maintain a following gapbehind a detected vehicle and slowyour vehicle to a stop behind thedetected vehicle.

If the stopped vehicle ahead hasdriven away and ACC has notresumed, the vehicle ahead symbolwill flash as a reminder to checktraffic ahead before proceeding. Inaddition, the left and right sides ofthe Safety Alert Seat will pulse threetimes, or three beeps will sound.See ”Alert Type” and “Go Notifier” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

When the vehicle ahead drivesaway, press +RES or theaccelerator pedal to resume cruisecontrol. If stopped for more thantwo minutes or if the driver door isopened and the driver safety belt isunbuckled, the ACC automaticallyapplies the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle. The EPBstatus light will turn on. See ParkingBrake 0 221. To resume ACC andrelease the EPB, press theaccelerator pedal.

A DIC warning message maydisplay indicating to shift to P (Park)before exiting the vehicle. SeeVehicle Messages 0 146.

{ Warning

If ACC has stopped the vehicle,and if ACC is disengaged, turnedoff, or canceled, the vehicle willno longer be held at a stop. Thevehicle can move. When ACC isholding the vehicle at a stop,always be prepared to manuallyapply the brakes.

{ Warning

Leaving the vehicle withoutplacing it in P (Park) can bedangerous. Do not leave thevehicle while it is being held at astop by ACC. Always place thevehicle in P (Park) and turn offthe ignition before leaving thevehicle.

ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, a DIC warningmessage will indicate automaticbraking will not occur. See VehicleMessages 0 146. ACC will resumeoperation when the acceleratorpedal is not being pressed.

{ Warning

The ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.

Curves in the Road

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicleaccelerates up to the set speed,especially when following avehicle exiting or entering exit

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

ramps. You could lose control ofthe vehicle or crash. Do not useACC while driving on an entranceor exit ramp. Always be ready touse the brakes if necessary.

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may respond toa vehicle in another lane, or maynot have time to react to a vehiclein your lane. You could crash intoa vehicle ahead of you, or losecontrol of your vehicle. Give extraattention in curves and be readyto use the brakes if necessary.Select an appropriate speed whiledriving in curves.

ACC may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce thevehicle speed if the curve is toosharp.

When following a vehicle andentering a curve, ACC may notdetect the vehicle ahead andaccelerate to the set speed. Whenthis happens, the vehicle aheadsymbol will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that isnot in your lane and apply thebrakes.

ACC may occasionally provide analert and/or braking that isconsidered unnecessary. It couldrespond to vehicles in differentlanes, signs, guardrails, and otherstationary objects when entering orexiting a curve. This is normaloperation. The vehicle does notneed service.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.



Do Not Use ACC on Hills andWhen Towing a Trailer

Do not use ACC when driving onsteep hills or when towing a trailer.ACC will not detect a vehicle in thelane while driving on steep hills. Thedriver will often need to take overacceleration and braking on steephills, especially when towing atrailer. If the brakes are applied, theACC disengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Press J.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if J ispressed or if the ignition isturned off.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The camera sensor on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror and the radar sensors on thefront of the vehicle can becomeblocked by snow, ice, dirt, or mud.These areas need to be cleaned forACC to operate properly.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care 0 337.

System operation may also belimited under snow, heavy rain,or road spray conditions.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashesor reduce crash damage whiledriving, backing, and parking. Readthis entire section before usingthese systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. Thesesystems do not replace the needfor paying attention and drivingsafely. You may not hear or feelalerts or warnings provided bythese systems. Failure to useproper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage. See Defensive Driving0 188.

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Detect children,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitoredby the system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide youwith enough time to avoid acrash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance featuresalert the driver of obstacles bybeeping. To change the volume ofthe warning chime, see “Comfortand Convenience” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

If equipped with the Safety AlertSeat, the driver seat cushion mayprovide a vibrating pulse alertinstead of beeping. To change this,see “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization0 157.

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Rear Parking Assist (RPA),Front Parking Assist (FPA),Surround Vision, Front VisionCamera, Rear Automatic Braking(RAB) and Backing WarningSystem, and Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA) may help the driverpark or avoid objects. Always checkaround the vehicle when parking orbacking.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the center stack display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press abutton on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or reach a vehiclespeed of 8 km/h (5 mph). The rearvision camera is above the licenseplate.

1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera



1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display onthe RVC screen to show that RearParking Assist (RPA) has detectedan object. This triangle changesfrom amber to red and increases insize the closer the object.

Surround Vision

If equipped, Surround Visiondisplays an image of the areasurrounding the vehicle, along with

the front or rear camera views in thecenter stack. The front camera is inthe grille or near the front emblem,the side cameras are on the bottomof the outside rearview mirrors, andthe rear camera is above the licenseplate.

{ Warning

The Surround Vision Camerashave blind spots and will notdisplay all objects near thecorners of the vehicle. Foldingside mirrors that are out ofposition will not display surroundview correctly. Always checkaround the vehicle when parkingor backing.

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

Front Vision Camera

If equipped, a view of the area infront of the vehicle displays in thecenter stack. The view displays after



shifting from R (Reverse) to aforward gear, or by pressingCAMERA in the center stack, andwhen the vehicle is moving forwardslower than 8 km/h (5 mph).If equipped, the front view cameraalso displays when the ParkingAssist system detects an objectwithin 30 cm (12 in).

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of thecameras’ field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Shown distances may be differentfrom actual distances. Do notdrive or park the vehicle usingonly these camera(s). Alwayscheck behind and around thevehicle before driving. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.

Parking Assist

With Front and Rear Parking Assist,as the vehicle moves at speeds ofless than 8 km/h (5 mph) thesensors on the bumpers may detectobjects up to 1.2 m (4 ft) in front and2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle withina zone 25 cm (10 in) high off theground and below bumper level.These detection distances may beshorter during warmer or humidweather. Blocked sensors will notdetect objects and can also causefalse detections. Keep the sensorsclean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, andslush; and clean sensors after a carwash in freezing temperatures.

{ Warning

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available atspeeds greater than 8 km/h(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or vehicle damage, even withparking assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.

The instrument cluster may have aparking assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object” and objectlocation information for the Frontand Rear Parking Assist system. Asthe object gets closer, more barslight up and the bars change colorfrom yellow to amber to red.

When an object is first detected inthe rear, one beep will be heardfrom the rear, or both sides of the



Safety Alert Seat will pulse twotimes. When an object is very close(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),a continuous beep will sound fromthe front or rear depending onobject location, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse fivetimes. Beeps for FPA are higherpitched than for RPA.

Backing Warning and RearAutomatic Braking

Vehicles with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) have the BackingWarning and Rear AutomaticBraking (RAB) system. The BackingWarning part of this system canwarn of rear objects when backingup at speeds greater than8 km/h (5 mph).

The Backing Warning System willbeep once from the rear when anobject is first detected, or pulsetwice on both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat. When the systemdetects a potential crash, beeps willbe heard from the rear, or fivepulses will be felt on both sides of

the Safety Alert Seat. There mayalso be a brief, sharp application ofthe brakes.

{ Warning

The Backing Warning Systemonly operates at speeds greaterthan 8 km/h (5 mph). It does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.In some situations, such as athigher backing speeds, there maynot be enough time for the short,sharp application of the vehiclebrake system to occur. To preventinjury, death, or vehicle damage,even with the Backing WarningSystem, always check the areaaround the vehicle and check allmirrors before backing.

When the vehicle is in R (Reverse),if the system detects the vehicle isbacking too fast to avoid a crashwith a detected object behind yourvehicle in your path, it may

automatically brake hard to a stop tohelp avoid or reduce the harmcaused by a backing crash.

{ Warning

Rear Automatic Braking may notavoid many types of backingcrashes. Do not wait for theautomatic braking to apply. Thissystem is not designed to replacedriver braking and only works inR (Reverse) when an object isdetected directly behind thevehicle. It may not brake or stopin time to avoid a crash. It will notbrake for objects when thevehicle is moving at very lowspeeds. It does not detectchildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or objects below thebumper or that are too close ortoo far from the vehicle. Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with RearAutomatic Braking, always checkthe area around the vehiclebefore and while backing.



Pressing the brake pedal after thevehicle comes to a stop will releasethe Rear Automatic Braking. If thebrake pedal is not pressed soonafter the stop, the Electric ParkingBrake may be set. When it is safe,press the accelerator pedal firmly atany time to override the RearAutomatic Braking.

{ Warning

There may be instances whereunexpected or undesiredautomatic braking occurs. If thishappens, either press the brakepedal or firmly press theaccelerator pedal to release thebrakes from the Rear AutomaticBraking system. Before releasingthe brakes, check the RVCscreen and check the areaaround the vehicle to make sure itis safe to proceed.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If equipped, when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), RCTAdisplays a red warning triangle with

a left or right pointing arrow on theRVC screen to warn of trafficcoming from the left or right. Thissystem detects objects coming fromup to 20 m (65 ft) from the left orright side of the vehicle. When anobject is detected, either threebeeps sound from the left or right orthree Safety Alert Seat pulses occuron the left or right side, dependingon the direction of the detectedvehicle.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend outfrom the back of the vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed.

Turning the Features On or Off

TheX button on the center stackis used to turn on or off the Frontand Rear Parking Assist, Rear

Cross Traffic Alert, Rear AutomaticBraking, and Backing WarningSystem at the same time. Theindicator light next to the buttoncomes on when the features are onand turns off when the featureshave been disabled.

Front and Rear Parking Assist canbe turned off, on, or on with towbarthrough vehicle personalization. See“Park Assist” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157. If the parkingassist is turned off through vehiclepersonalization, the park assistbutton will be disabled. To turn theparking assist on again, select On inthe vehicle personalization menu.The On with Towbar setting allowsfor the parking assist to workproperly with a small item attachedto the trailer hitch.

Turn off parking assist and RearAutomatic Braking when towing atrailer.

To turn the RPA symbols, guidancelines (on some models), or RearCross Traffic Alert on or off, see“Rear Camera” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.



On some vehicles RCTA setting canbe turned off through “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving thevehicle in a forward gear, ForwardCollision Alert (FCA), LaneDeparture Warning (LDW), LaneKeep Assist (LKA), Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA), Lane Change Alert(LCA), and/or the Front AutomaticBraking (FAB) System can help toavoid a crash or reduce crashdamage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.

FCA also lights an amber visualalert if following another vehiclemuch too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 40 km/h (25 mph). If thevehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC), it can detect vehicles todistances of approximately 110 m(360 ft) and operates at all speeds.See Adaptive Cruise Control 0 229.

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. FCA does not warnof pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving 0 188.

FCA can be disabled with the FCAsteering wheel control, or if yourvehicle is equipped with AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), throughvehicle personalization. See the“Auto Collision Preparation” portionof “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization0 157.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected,the vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay green. Vehicles may not bedetected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills, due to poor visibility;or if a vehicle ahead is partiallyblocked by pedestrians or otherobjects. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.



{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times.When this Collision Alert occurs, thebrake system may prepare for driverbraking to occur more rapidly whichcan cause a brief, mild deceleration.Continue to apply the brake pedalas needed. Cruise control may bedisengaged when the Collision Alertoccurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ to set theFCA timing to Far, Medium, Near,or on some vehicles, Off. The firstbutton press shows the currentsetting on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). Additional buttonpresses will change this setting. Thechosen setting will remain until it ischanged and will affect the timing ofboth the Collision Alert and theTailgating Alert features. The timingof both alerts will vary based onvehicle speed. The faster thevehicle speed, the farther away thealert will occur. Consider traffic and



weather conditions when selectingthe alert timing. The range ofselectable alert timing may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC),changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the ACCfollowing gap setting (Far, Medium,or Near).

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts for turning vehicles, vehiclesin other lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, cleaning theoutside of the windshield in front ofthe camera sensor on thewindshield behind the rearviewmirror, and cleaning the front of thevehicle where radar sensors andheadlamps are located, may correctthe issue.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care 0 337.

System operation may also belimited under snow, heavy rain,or road spray conditions.

Front Automatic Braking(FAB) SystemIf the vehicle has Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it also has FAB,which includes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA). When the systemdetects a vehicle ahead in your paththat is traveling in the samedirection that you may be about tocrash into, it can provide a boost tobraking or automatically brake thevehicle. This can help avoid orlessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear. Dependingon the situation, the vehicle mayautomatically brake moderately orhard. This front automatic brakingcan only occur if a vehicle isdetected. This is shown by the FCAvehicle ahead indicator being lit.See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 242.

The system works when driving in aforward gear above 4 km/h (2 mph).It can detect vehicles up toapproximately 60 m (197 ft).

{ Warning

FAB is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Donot rely on FAB to brake thevehicle. FAB will not brakeoutside of its operating speedrange and only responds todetected vehicles.

FAB may not:

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

. Detect all vehicles,especially vehicles with atrailer, tractors, muddyvehicles, etc.

. Detect a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, suchas in fog, rain, or snow.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Detect a vehicle ahead if itis partially blocked bypedestrians or other objects.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

FAB may slow the vehicle to acomplete stop to try to avoid apotential crash. If this happens, FABmay engage the Electric ParkingBrake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at astop. Release the EPB or firmlypress the accelerator pedal.

{ Warning

FAB may automatically brake thevehicle suddenly in situationswhere it is unexpected andundesired. It could respond to aturning vehicle ahead, guardrails,signs, and other non-moving

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

objects. To override FAB, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providinga boost to braking based on thespeed of approach and distance toa vehicle ahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the brake pedal shouldcontinue to be applied as needed.IBA will automatically disengageonly when the brake pedal isreleased.

{ Warning

IBA may increase vehicle brakingin situations when it may not benecessary. You could block the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

flow of traffic. If this occurs, takeyour foot off the brake pedal andthen apply the brakes as needed.

FAB and IBA can be disabledthrough vehicle personalization. See“Auto Collision Preparation” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

{ Warning

Using FAB or IBA while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.Turn the system to Off whentowing a trailer.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes thatoccur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas.



When the vehicle is in a forwardgear, the left or right side mirrordisplay will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in that blindzone. If the turn signal is activatedand a vehicle is also detected onthe same side, the display will flashas an extra warning not to changelanes. Since this system is part ofthe Lane Change Alert system, readthe entire Lane Change Alertsection before using this feature.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding lane changecrashes that occur with movingvehicles in the side blind zone (orspot) areas or with vehicles rapidlyapproaching these areas frombehind. The LCA warning displaywill light up in the correspondingoutside side mirror and will flash ifthe turn signal is on.

{ Warning

LCA does not alert the driver tovehicles outside of the systemdetection zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. It may notprovide alerts when changinglanes under all driving conditions.Failure to use proper care whenchanging lanes may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Before making a lane change,always check mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

1. SBZA Detection Zone2. LCA Detection Zone

LCA Detection Zones

The LCA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. TheSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)warning area starts at approximatelythe middle of the vehicle and goesback 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are alsowarned of vehicles rapidlyapproaching from up to 70 m (230 ft)behind the vehicle.

How the System Works

The LCA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the nextlane over that is in the side blindzone or rapidly approaching thatzone from behind. A lit LCA symbolindicates it may be unsafe tochange lanes. Before making a lanechange, check the LCA display,check mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turn signals.



Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror LCA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is in a forward gear, the leftor right side mirror display will lightup if a moving vehicle is detected inthe next lane over in that blind zoneor rapidly approaching that zone.If the turn signal is activated in thesame direction as a detectedvehicle, this display will flash as anextra warning not to change lanes.

LCA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization using theSide Blind Zone Alert option. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.If LCA is disabled by the driver, theLCA mirror displays will not light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The LCA system requires somedriving for the system to calibrate tomaximum performance. Thiscalibration may occur more quickly ifthe vehicle is driving on a straighthighway road with traffic androadside objects (e.g., guardrails,barriers).

LCA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly, fora stopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The LCA detection zonesthat extend back from the side ofthe vehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. LCA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extendingout to either side of the vehicle.Attached objects may also interferewith the detection of vehicles. Thisis normal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

LCA may not always alert the driverto vehicles in the next lane over,especially in wet conditions or when

driving on sharp curves. The systemdoes not need to be serviced. Thesystem may light up due toguardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, andother non-moving objects. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

LCA may not operate when the LCAsensors in the left or right corners ofthe rear bumper are covered withmud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see "Washing theVehicle" under Exterior Care 0 337.If the DIC still displays the systemunavailable message after cleaningboth sides of the vehicle toward therear corners of the vehicle, see yourdealer.

If the LCA displays do not light upwhen vehicles are in the side blindzone or rapidly approaching thiszone and the system is clean, thesystem may need service. Take thevehicle to your dealer.



When LCA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the Side Blind Zone Alert Onoption will not be available on thepersonalization menu.

Radio Frequency Information

See Radio Frequency Statement0 373.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide awarning if the vehicle is crossing adetected lane marking without usinga turn signal in the lane departuredirection. Since this system is partof the Lane Keep Assist (LKA)system, read the entire LKA sectionbefore using this feature.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lane

marking without using a turn signalin that direction. It may also providea Lane Departure Warning (LDW)system alert as the lane marking iscrossed. The LKA system will notassist or provide an LDW alert if itdetects that you are activelysteering. Override LKA by turningthe steering wheel. LKA uses acamera to detect lane markingsbetween 60 km/h (37 mph) and180 km/h (112 mph).

{ Warning

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.It may not keep the vehicle in thelane or give a Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) alert, even if alane marking is detected.

The LKA and LDW systemsmay not:

. Provide an alert or enoughsteering assist to avoid alane departure or crash.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield orheadlamps are blocked bydirt, snow, or ice, if they arenot in proper condition, or ifthe sun shines directly intothe camera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LKA only detects lane markingson one side of the road, it willonly assist or provide an LDWalert when approaching the laneon the side where it has detecteda lane marking. Even with LKAand LDW, you must steer thevehicle. Always keep yourattention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death could

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

occur. Always keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LKA inbad weather conditions.

{ Warning

Using LKA while towing a traileror on slippery roads could causeloss of control of the vehicle anda crash. Turn the system off.

How the System Works

The LKA camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LKA on and off, pressAon the center stack.

When on,A is green if LKA isavailable to assist and provide LDWalerts. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel anddisplayA as amber if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using a turn signal in thatdirection. It may also provide anLDW alert by flashingA amberas the lane marking is crossed.Additionally, there will be threebeeps, or the driver seat will pulsethree times, on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection.

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.If LKA does not detect active driversteering, an alert and chime may beprovided. Move the steering wheelto dismiss.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system performance may beaffected by:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, suchas when driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

. Roads with poor lane markings,such as two-lane roads.

If the LKA system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindshield may help.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alertsmay occur due to tar marks,shadows, cracks in the road,temporary or construction lanemarkings, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice. Turn LKA off if theseconditions continue.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S. and Canada, tohelp keep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend usingTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

Use premium unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 91 orhigher. Regular unleaded gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher can be

used, but acceleration and fueleconomy will be reduced, and anaudible knocking noise may beheard. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 91 octane or higher as soonas possible. Otherwise, the enginecould be damaged. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a 91 octane rating orhigher, the engine needs service.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. The fuelsindustry automatically modifies thefuel for the appropriate season.If fuel is left in the vehicle tank forlong periods of time, driving orstarting could be affected. Drive thevehicle until the fuel is at one-halftank or less, then refuel with thecurrent seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenatessuch as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines, areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.

However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inFlexFuel vehicles.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines, mainly high octaneracing gasolines, can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines and/or fuel additives withMMT as they can reduce spark pluglife and affect emission controlsystem performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, see your dealerfor service.



California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 131.If this occurs, return to yourauthorized dealer for diagnosis. If itis determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used,repairs may not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, manganese, or any otherfuel not recommended. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improperfuel would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel 0 250.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help. Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not use a cell phonewhile refueling.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if therefueling nozzle is insertedtoo quickly. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hotweather. Insert the refuelingnozzle slowly and wait forany hiss noise to stop priorto beginning to flow fuel

Locate the fuel door. The fuel gaugehas an arrow to indicate the side ofthe vehicle the fuel door is on.If equipped, the fuel door is locked

when the vehicle doors are locked.Press K on the RKE transmitter tounlock. To open the fuel door, pushand release the rearward centeredge of the door.

The vehicle has a capless refuelingsystem and does not have a fuelcap. The filling nozzle must be fullyinserted and latched prior to startingfuel flow.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the

nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 337.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Filling the Tank With a PortableGas Can

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portablegas can:

1. Locate the capless funneladapter from inside the vehicle.

2. Insert and latch the funnel intothe capless fuel system.



{ Warning

Attempting to refuel without usingthe funnel adapter may cause fuelspillage and damage the caplessfuel system. This could cause afire and you or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged.

3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return to thestorage location.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside thefill opening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, lightmatches, or use lighterswhile pumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 333. Fortowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 333.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with the stateand local laws that apply totrailer towing.



. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

. Do not use Adaptive CruiseControl when towing.

. Turn off Parking Assist whentowing.

. The Front Automatic BrakingSystem should be set to Offwhen towing. See FrontAutomatic Braking (FAB) System0 244.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.


. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outsideair. See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 210.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as the

vehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it is



necessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,

or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

When towing, use the Tow/HaulMode to prevent damage to theengine or transmission. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 216.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil at

a lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with thetransmission in P (Park) for a fewminutes before turning the engineoff. If the overheat warning comeson, see Engine Overheating 0 277.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.



If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regularbrakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brakepedal.


3. Shift into a gear.


5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 348.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingDo not tow a trailer during break-in.See New Vehicle Break-In 0 202.

Before towing a trailer, see"Hands-Free Operation" underLiftgate 0 39.

{ Warning

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.



Caution

Pulling a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” later in thissection.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, and how muchthe vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. It can depend onany special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section.

Trailer Weight Rating (TWR) iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas only the driver but all requiredtrailering equipment. Weight ofadditional optional equipment,passengers, and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted fromthe TWR.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

Escalade 2WD Short Wheelbase 3.23/3.42 3 765 kg (8,300 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 4WD Short Wheelbase 3.23/3.42 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 2WD Long Wheelbase 3.23/3.42 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 4WD Long Wheelbase with20 inch wheels

3.23/3.42 3 583 kg (7,900 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 4WD Long Wheelbase with22 inch wheels

3.23/3.42 3 583 kg (7,900 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isvery important because it is alsopart of the vehicle weight. TheGross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the

vehicle, any cargo carried in it, andthe people who will be riding in thevehicle as well as trailer tongueweight. Vehicle options, equipment,passengers, and cargo in thevehicle reduce the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry,

which will also reduce the trailerweight the vehicle can tow. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 198 for moreinformation about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity.



Trailer tongue weight (1) should be10% to 15% of the loaded trailerweight (2) up to the maximums forvehicle series and hitch type.

Vehicle Series Hitch TypeMaximum Tongue

Weight

1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lb)

1500 Weight Distributing 453 kg (1,000 lb)

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

Trailer rating may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). See “Total Weighton the Vehicle's Tires” later in thissection.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

If a cargo carrier is used in thetrailer hitch receiver, choose acarrier that positions the load asclose to the vehicle as possible.Make sure the total weight,including the carrier, is no more thanhalf of the maximum allowabletongue weight for the vehicle or 227kg (500 lb), whichever is less.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the inflation pressuresfound on the Certification label onthe center pillar or see Vehicle LoadLimits 0 198. Make sure not toexceed the GVWR limit for thevehicle, or the RGAWR, with the towvehicle and trailer fully loaded forthe trip including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using aweight-distributing hitch, make sure



not to exceed the RGAWR beforeapplying the weight distributionspring bars.

Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailer doesnot exceed any of its weight ratings— GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, TWRor Tongue Weight. The only way tobe sure it is not exceeding any ofthese ratings is to weigh the towvehicle and trailer combination, fullyloaded for the trip, getting individualweights for each of these items.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Mostsmall-to-medium trailers can betowed with a weight-carrying hitchwhich simply features a couplerlatched to the hitch ball. Largertrailers may require aweight-distributing hitch that usesspring bars to distribute the trailertongue weight among the two

vehicle and trailer axles. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” inTrailer Towing 0 256 for rating limitswith various hitch types.

Consider using sway controls withany trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controls orrefer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

Weight-Distributing HitchAdjustment

1. Front of Vehicle2. Body to Ground Distance

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the spring bars should beadjusted so the distance (2) is thesame after coupling the trailer to thetow vehicle and adjusting the hitch.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. If the trailer beingtowed weighs up to 2 271 kg(5,000 lb) with a factory-installedstep bumper, safety chains may beattached to the attaching points onthe bumper, otherwise, safetychains should be attached to holeson the trailer hitch platform. Alwaysleave just enough slack so thecombination can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.



Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 900 kg (2,000 lb) needs to haveits own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Since the vehicle is equipped withStabiliTrak, the trailer brakes cannottap into the vehicle's hydraulicsystem.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The seven-pin trailer connector ismounted in the bumper. Thisconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector available throughyour dealer.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

. Green/Violet: Right Stop/TurnSignal

. Brown: Taillamps

. White: Ground

. Light Green: Back-up Lamps

. Red/Green: Battery Feed

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

If charging a remote (non-vehicle)battery, press the Tow/Haul modebutton at the end of the shift lever.This will boost the vehicle systemvoltage and properly charge thebattery. If the trailer is too light forTow/Haul mode, turn on theheadlamps as a second way toboost the vehicle system andcharge the battery.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brakecontroller.

The harness should be installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter.

Tow/Haul Mode

Pressing this button at the end ofthe shift lever turns on and off theTow/Haul Mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode is on.



Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode 0 216.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” underTrailer Towing 0 256. Tow/Haul ismost useful under the followingdriving conditions:

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load instop-and-go traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to the

selection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have aTSC feature. Trailer sway isunintended side-to-side motion of atrailer while being towed. If thevehicle is towing a trailer and theTSC detects that sway is increasing,the vehicle brakes are selectivelyapplied at each wheel, to helpreduce excessive trailer sway.

If TSC is enabled, the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakwarning light will flash on theinstrument cluster. Vehicle speedmust be reduced. If trailer swaycontinues, StabiliTrak can reduce

engine torque to help slow thevehicle. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 224.

{ Warning

Even if the vehicle is equippedwith TSC, trailer sway could resultin loss of control and the vehiclecould crash. If excessive trailersway is detected, slow down to asafe speed. Check the trailer andvehicle to help correct possiblecauses. These could include animproperly or overloaded trailer,unrestrained cargo, impropertrailer hitch configuration,excessive vehicle-trailer speed,or improperly inflated or incorrectvehicle or trailer tires. See TowingEquipment 0 260 for trailer ratingsand hitch setuprecommendations.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 265.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light)0 131. A device connected to theData Link Connector (DLC)—such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device—may interfere with vehiclesystems. This could affect vehicleoperation and cause a crash.Such devices may also accessinformation stored in the vehicle’ssystems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 88 and Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle0 88.


264 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 265California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . . 265

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 271Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 273Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 277Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Battery - North America . . . . . . 282

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 284Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 285

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 285Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 286Windshield Replacement . . . . . 286

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 287LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 288Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . 289Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Instrument Panel Fuse Block(Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 301Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317


Vehicle Care 265

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 317Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 328

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 333Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningWARNING: Most motor vehicles,including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive

harm. Engine exhaust, many partsand systems, many fluids, andsome component wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals.

See Battery - North America 0 282and Jump Starting - North America0 329.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things as


266 Vehicle Care

airbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 88.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information0 372.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 88.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 359.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is inside the vehicleunder the steering wheel.


Vehicle Care 267

2. Go to the front of the vehicle tofind the secondary hoodrelease. The handle is underthe front edge of the hood nearthe center. Push the handle tothe right and at the same timeraise the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenbring the hood from full open towithin 15 cm (6 in) from the closedposition, pause, and push the frontcenter of the hood with a swift, firmmotion to fully close the hood.


268 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview


Vehicle Care 269

1. Positive (+) Terminal. SeeJump Starting - North America0 329.

2. Battery - North America 0 282.

3. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem 0 274.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 273.

5. Remote Negative (–) Location(Out of View). See JumpStarting - North America 0 329.

6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 274.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 269.

8. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 269.

9. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 279.

10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 281.

11. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 289.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Always use engine oil approvedto the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 271.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overview0 268 for the location of the engineoil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.


270 Vehicle Care

2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean paper towel orcloth, then push it back in allthe way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications 0 361.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 268 for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 357.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1™ specification.Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 271

Caution (Continued)

vehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity gradeengine oil.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, alwaysselect an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors which

include engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages 0 149.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.


272 Vehicle Care

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Using the DIC controls on theright side of the steering wheel,display OIL LIFE on the DIC.See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 140. When remainingoil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON messagewill appear on the display. SeeEngine Oil Messages 0 149.

2. Press SEL on the DIC controlsand hold SEL down for a fewseconds to clear the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON messageand reset the oil life at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oillife display accidentally at anytime other than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition on with theengine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage is off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. This vehicle is notequipped with a transmission fluidlevel dipstick. There is a specialprocedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid inthese vehicles. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Information0 372.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage may

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 273

Caution (Continued)

not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 357.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 348. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 357.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview0 268 for the location of the engineair cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air cleaner/filter see Maintenance Schedule0 348.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine aircleaner/filter housing and nearbycomponents are free of dirt anddebris. Remove the engine aircleaner/filter. Lightly tap and shakethe engine air cleaner/filter (awayfrom the vehicle), to release loosedust and dirt. Inspect the engine aircleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not cleanthe engine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Screws2. Electrical Connector3. Air Duct Clamp

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 268.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air ductclamp (3).

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (2) and theconnector harness from thecover.

4. Remove the four screws (1) ontop of the cover of the housingand lift up the cover.


274 Vehicle Care

5. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Takecare to dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

6. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

7. Inspect or replace the engineair cleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2-4 to reinstallthe filter cover housing.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1. Coolant Surge Tank2. Coolant Surge Tank

Pressure Cap

3. Engine Cooling Fan

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fan canstart even when the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, alwayskeep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any enginecooling fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 275

Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 277.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 357.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, or by pouringit on the ground or into sewers,


276 Vehicle Care

streams, or bodies of water. Havethe coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 268.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.

The coolant level should be at orabove the FULL COLD mark. If it isnot, there may be a leak in thecooling system.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank forGasoline Engines

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.


Vehicle Care 277

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant:

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss meansthere is still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the FULLCOLD mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until the

engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates approximately90 °C (195 °F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches theFULL COLD mark.

5. Replace the pressure captightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1-6.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine Overheating

Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge in the vehicle's instrumentcluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge 0 128.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE, and ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED messages in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeEngine Cooling System Messages0 148 and Engine Power Messages0 149.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away.


278 Vehicle Care

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Check to see if the engine coolingfan(s) are running. If the engine isoverheating, the fans should berunning. If they are not, do notcontinue to run the engine, andhave the vehicle serviced.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or others

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

could be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but no steam is seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when the vehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing0 256.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.


Vehicle Care 279

If there is still no sign of steam andthe vehicle is equipped with anengine driven cooling fan, pushdown the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at leastfive minutes while the vehicle isparked. If the warning is still there,turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has electric coolingfans, the fans may be heardspinning at low speed during mosteveryday driving. The fans may turnoff if no cooling is required. Underheavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,high outside temperatures,or operation of the air conditioningsystem, the fans may change tohigh speed and an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland indicates that the cooling

system is functioning properly. Thefans will change to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

The electric engine cooling fansmay run after the engine has beenturned. off. This is normal and noservice is required.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID message

displays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 268 forreservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

(Continued)


280 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause thesolution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be

heard all the time when the vehicleis moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and

evenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 361.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or parts are improperlyinstalled.


Vehicle Care 281

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 268 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed.With a leak, the brakes will notwork well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 0 133.

Brake fluid absorbs water over time.Replace brake fluid at the specifiedintervals to prevent increasedstopping distance. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 348.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 268.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above MIN but not over theMAX mark.


282 Vehicle Care

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3brake fluid from a clean, sealedcontainer. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 357.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 268 for battery location.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 265.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 329 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

If the vehicle is equipped withFour-Wheel Drive, be sure toperform the lubricant checksdescribed in this section.


Vehicle Care 283

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule0 348 to determine how often tocheck the lubricant.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug (1) hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enough

lubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Usecare not to overtighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 357 to determine whatkind of lubricant to use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck front axle fluid unless a leakis suspected, or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.



1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

. When the differential is cold, addenough lubricant to raise thelevel from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fillplug (1) hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm),add enough lubricant to raise thelevel to the bottom of the fillplug (1) hole.

What to Use



284 Vehicle Care

Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluid levelon any axle, variations in thereadings can be caused by factoryfill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume.Also, if a vehicle has just beendriven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower thannormal because fluid has traveledout along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sump area.Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle hasbeen driven will appear to have alower fluid level than a vehicle thathas been stationary for an hour or

two. The rear axle assembly mustbe supported on a flat, level surfaceto get a true reading.



The proper level is 1.0 mm to19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in) belowthe bottom of the fill hole, located onthe rear axle. Add only enough fluidto reach the proper level.

What to Use


Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).


Vehicle Care 285

If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the

shift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove foot

pressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts0 358.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the wiper bladeassembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.


286 Vehicle Care

2. Lift up on the latch in themiddle of the wiper bladewhere the wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough torelease it from the J-hookedend of the wiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by the vehicle

warranty. Do not allow thewiper blade arm to touch thewindshield.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass.

The rear wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position socare should be used whenpulling it away from the vehicle.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely in the wiper arm hookuntil the release lever clicksinto place.

4. Return the wiper arm andblade assembly to the restposition on the glass.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealerto determine the correctreplacement glass.

Windshield Replacement

HUD System

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the windshield must bereplaced, get one that is designedfor HUD or the HUD image maylook out of focus.


Vehicle Care 287

Driver Assistance Systems

When a windshield replacement isneeded and the vehicle is equippedwith a front-looking camera sensorfor the Driver Assistance Systems,the windshield must be installedaccording to GM specifications forthese systems to work properly. If itis not, there may be unexpectedbehavior and/or messages fromthese systems. See ObjectDetection System Messages 0 150.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs0 288.

For any bulb-changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.


288 Vehicle Care

License Plate Lamp

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

1. Bulb Socket2. Bulb3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the lamp assembly (3)toward the center of thevehicle.

2. Pull the lamp assembly downto remove.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socketand turn the bulb socketclockwise to install it into thelamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the releasetab locks into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

License Plate Lamp W5W LL

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


Vehicle Care 289

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses to protectagainst an electrical systemoverload. Fuses also protect powerdevices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thereare some spare fuses and a fusepuller in the Instrument Panel FuseBlock. The same amperage fusecan also be borrowed. Choosesome feature of the vehicle that isnot needed to use and replace it assoon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis in the engine compartment, onthe driver side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover to access the fuseblock.


290 Vehicle Care

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

A fuse puller is available in the leftinstrument panel fuse block.


Vehicle Care 291

Item Usage

1 Electric runningboards

Item Usage

2 Antilock brakesystem pump

Item Usage

3 Interior BEC LT1

4 MBS passenger


292 Vehicle Care

Item Usage

5 Suspensionlevelingcompressor

6 4WD transfer caseelectronic control

10 Electric parkingbrake

13 Interior BEC LT2

14 Rear BEC 1

17 MBS driver

21 ALC exhaustsolenoid

23 Integrated chassiscontrol module

24 Real timedampening

25 Fuel pump powermodule

26 Spare/Batteryregulated voltagecontrol

28 Upfitter 2

29 Upfitter 2 relay

Item Usage

30 Wiper

31 TIM

34 Back-up lamps

35 Antilock brakesystem valve

36 Trailer brakes

37 Upfitter 3 relay

39 Trailer stop, turnright

40 Trailer stop,turn left

41 Trailer park lamps

42 Right parkinglamps

43 Left parking lamps

44 Upfitter 3

45 Automatic levelcontrol run, crank

47 Upfitter 4

48 Upfitter 4 relay

49 Reverse lamps

51 Parking lamp relay

Item Usage

59 Euro trailer

60 Air conditioningcontrol

63 Upfitter 1

67 Trailer battery

69 RC upfitter 3 and 4

70 VBAT upfitter3 and 4

72 Upfitter 1 relay

74 Engine controlmodule ignition

75 Miscellaneousignition spare

76 Transmissionignition

77 RC upfitter 1 and 2

78 VBAT upfitter1 and 2

83 Euro trailer RC

84 Run, crank relay

87 Engine

88 Injector A – odd


Vehicle Care 293

Item Usage

89 Injector B – even

90 Oxygen sensor B

91 Throttle control

92 Engine controlmodule relay

93 Horn

94 Fog lamps

95 High-beamheadlamps

100 Oxygen sensor A

101 Engine controlmodule

102 Engine controlmodule/Transmissioncontrol module

103 Auxiliary interiorheater

104 Starter

107 Aero shutter

109 Police upfitter

112 Starter relay

Item Usage

114 Front windshieldwasher

115 Rear windowwasher

116 Cooling fan left

121 Right HIDheadlamp

122 Left HID headlamp

123 Cooling fan right

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left)

The left instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the driver sideedge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


294 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Number Usage

1 Not used

2 Not used

Number Usage

3 Not used

4 Accessory poweroutlet 1

5 Retained accessorypower/Accessory

6 APO/BATT

7 Universal garage dooropener/Inside rearview mirror

8 SEO retainedaccessory power

9 Not used

10 Body control module 3


12 Steering wheelcontrols backlighting

13 Not used

14 Not used

15 Not used

16 Discrete logic ignitionsensor

17 VPM


Vehicle Care 295

Number Usage

18 Mirror window module


20 Front bolster (ifequipped)

21 Not used

22 Not used

23 Not used

24 Heater, ventilation andair conditioningignition/Heater,ventilation and airconditioning auxiliary

25 Instrument clusterignition/Sensingdiagnostic moduleignition

26 Tilt column/SEO, tiltcolumn lock 1/SEO

27 Data link connector/Driver seat module

28 Passive entry/Passivestart/Heater,ventilation and airconditioning battery

Number Usage

29 Content theft

30 Not used

31 Not used

32 Not used

33 SEO/Automatic levelcontrol

34 Park enable electricadjustable pedal (ifequipped)

35 Not used

36 Miscellaneous R/C

37 Heated steering wheel

38 Steering column lock2 (if equipped)

39 Instrument clusterbattery

40 Not used

41 Not used

42 Euro trailer (ifequipped)

43 Left doors

44 Driver power seat

Number Usage

45 Not used

46 Right heated,cooled seat

47 Left heated,cooled seat

48 Not used

49 Not used


51 Not used

52 Retained accessorypower/Accessoryrelay

53 Run, crank relay

54 Not used

55 Not used

56 Not used


296 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Right)

The right instrument panel fuseblock access door is on thepassenger side edge of theinstrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


Number Usage

1 Not used

2 Not used


Vehicle Care 297

Number Usage

3 Not used


5 Not used

6 Not used

7 Not used

8 Glove box

9 Not used

10 Not used

11 Not used

12 Steering wheelcontrols


14 Not used

15 Not used

16 Not used

17 Not used

18 Not used


20 Rear seatentertainment

Number Usage

21 Sunroof

22 Not used

23 Not used

24 Not used

25 Not used

26 Info/Airbag

27 Spare/RF WDWRN SW

28 Obstacledetection/USB

29 Radio

30 Not used

31 Not used

32 Not used

33 Not used

34 Not used

35 Not used

36 SEO B2

37 SEO


39 A/C Inverter

Number Usage

40 Not used

41 Not used

42 Not used

43 Not used

44 Right door windowmotor

45 Front blower



48 Amplifier

49 Right front seat


51 Not used

52 Retained accessorypower/Accessoryrelay

53 Not used

54 Not used

55 Not used

56 Not used


298 Vehicle Care

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind the access panel on the leftside of the compartment.

Pull the panel out by grabbing thefinger access slot at the rear edge.


ISO MiniRelays

Usage

1 Rear defogger

MicroFuses

Usage

2 Heated second rowseat left

3 Heated second rowseat right

4 Heated mirrors

5 Liftgate

6 Glass breakage

7 Liftglass

8 Liftgate module logic

9 Rear wiper

10 Rear heater,ventilation and airconditioning blower

11 Second row seat

19 Rear fog lamp (ifequipped)


Vehicle Care 299

M-TypeFuses

Usage

12 Liftgate module

13 Third row seat

14 Rear accessory poweroutlet

15 Rear defogger

UltraMicroRelays

Usage

16 Liftgate

MicroRelays

Usage

17 Liftglass

18 Rear fog lamp (ifequipped)

19 Heated mirrors

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 198.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)


300 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation 0 307 forinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 300.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increased

traction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 314.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If winter


Vehicle Care 301

tires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile Tires

22-Inch Tires

If the vehicle has 22-inch P285/45R22 size tires, they areclassified as touring tires andare designed for on-road use.The low-profile, wide treaddesign is not recommended foroff-road driving. See Off-RoadDriving 0 190, for additionalinformation.

Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contactwith road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or when

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

sliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have all-terraintires. These tires provide goodperformance on most road surfaces,weather conditions, and for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving 0 190.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more quickly than other tires.Consider rotating the tires morefrequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wearis noted when the tires areinspected. See Tire Inspection0 312.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexample shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.


302 Vehicle Care

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the third

week of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading 0 316.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 306 and Vehicle Load Limits0 198.

(8) Temporary Use Only : Onlyuse a temporary spare tire untilthe road tire is repaired andreplaced. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph)when pulling a trailer, with theproper inflation pressure. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 328.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The example shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.


Vehicle Care 303

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration, it

would mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.


304 Vehicle Care

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 306.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 198.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 198.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 198.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.


Vehicle Care 305

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 198.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommended

tire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure 0 306 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 198.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 313.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 316.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 198.


306 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 198.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 198. How thevehicle is loaded affects vehiclehandling and ride comfort. Neverload the vehicle with moreweight than it was designed tocarry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.


Vehicle Care 307

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 328 foradditional information.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If the

inflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, putsadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.This could cause a crash, and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

you or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicleto be driven at high speeds, makesure the tires are rated forhigh-speed operation, are inexcellent condition, and are set tothe correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

When driving the vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, setthe cold inflation pressure to 20 kPa(3 psi) above the recommended tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. Returnthe tires to the recommended coldtire inflation pressure whenhigh-speed driving has ended. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 198 and TirePressure 0 306.


308 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.

This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 309.



Vehicle Care 309

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lighton the instrument cluster. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressure

shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 198.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 140.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires when

they are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 198 for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 306.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection0 312, Tire Rotation 0 312, andTires 0 299.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.


310 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 314.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. TheTPMS sensor matching processshould also be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,


Vehicle Care 311

passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire. See your dealer for service orto purchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure Monitor SensorActivation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Place the vehicle power modein ON/RUN/START. SeeIgnition Positions 0 203.

3. Make sure the Tire Pressureinfo display option is turned on.The info displays on the DICcan be turned on and off

through the Settings menu.See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 140.

4. Use the five-way DIC controlon the right side of the steeringwheel to scroll to the TirePressure screen under the DICinfo page. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 140.

5. Press and hold the SEL buttonin the center of the five-wayDIC control.

The horn sounds twice tosignal the receiver is in relearnmode and the TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

11. Press ENGINE START/STOPto turn the ignition off.

12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.


312 Vehicle Care

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 348.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires 0 313 and WheelReplacement 0 317.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure 0 306 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 198.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 309.


Vehicle Care 313

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 361.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators. See TireInspection 0 312 and Tire Rotation0 312 for additional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be free


314 Vehicle Care

of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of the

vehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 301 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 312 for information

on proper tire rotation. However,if it is necessary to replace onlyone axle set of worn tires, placethe new tires on the rear axle.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 315

Warning (Continued)

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as theroad tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 308.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on the

vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 198 for the label location andmore information about the Tireand Loading Information label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for those

(Continued)


316 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

wheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 314 andAccessories and Modifications0 265.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. The

Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


Vehicle Care 317

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.


318 Vehicle Care

Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash. Use anothertype of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it forthe vehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, driveslowly and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.


Vehicle Care 319

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others could

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 172.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever inP (Park).

(Continued)


320 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

3. For vehicles withfour-wheel-drive with aN (Neutral) transfer caseposition, be sure thetransfer case is in a drivegear — not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

6. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.

Tire ChangingBefore changing a flat tire, see"Hands-Free Operation" underLiftgate 0 39.

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment needed to change aflat tire is stored in the rear of thevehicle, on the driver side, behind adoor in the trim panel.

1. Jack Knob2. Wing Nut Retaining the

Wheel Blocks3. Wing Nut Retaining the

Tool Bag

If equipped, the tow eyebolt will be in a bag securedto the tool bag.


Vehicle Care 321

1. Pull to open the trimpanel door.

The third row driver side seatmay need to be folded toaccess the trim panel door.

2. Lift the acoustic pad to accessthe jack and tools.

3. Turn the wing nut retaining thetool bag (3) counterclockwise toremove it.

Pull the tool bag toward thefront of the vehicle and lift therear portion of the bag upwardto remove it.

4. Turn the jack knob (1)counterclockwise to release thejack and wheel blocks from thebracket.

5. Turn the wing nut retaining thewheel blocks (2)counterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer.

Use the following tools:

1. Jack2. Wheel Blocks3. Jack Handle4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench

To access the spare tire, refer to thefollowing graphics and instructions:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)10. Tire/Wheel Retainer11. Hoist Cable


322 Vehicle Care

1. Open the hoist shaft accessdoor (3) on the bumper toaccess the spare tire lock (6).

If equipped with a hitch cover,turn the hitch cover retainerscounterclockwise and pull thecover downward to remove itbefore removing the hoist shaftaccess door.

2. To remove the spare tire lock(6), insert the key locatedinside the remote, turn itclockwise, and then pull itstraight out.

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5), as shown.

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the holein the rear bumper (8) (hoistshaft access hole).

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (7) connects to thehoist shaft. The ribbed squareend of the extension is used tolower the spare tire.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.


Vehicle Care 323

6. Use the wheel wrench hook topull the hoist cable closer toassist in reaching thespare tire.

7. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.Tilt the retainer and pull it andthe cable and spring throughthe center of the wheel.

Once the retainer is separatedfrom the guide pin, tilt theretainer and pull it through thecenter of the wheel along withthe cable and latch.

8. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 319 for more information.

2. If the vehicle has a center capthat covers the wheelfasteners, place the chisel endof the wheel wrench in the sloton the wheel and gently pry thecap out.

3. Use the wheel wrench toloosen all the wheel nuts. Turnthe wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen thewheel nuts. Do not remove thewheel nuts yet.


324 Vehicle Care

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

Left Front Shown, Right FrontSimilar

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a front tire of the vehicle,use the jack handle and only

one jack handle extension.Attach the wheel wrench to thejack handle extension. Attachthe jack handle to the jack.Position the jack on the framebehind the flat tire where theframe sections overlap. Turnthe wheel wrench clockwise toraise the vehicle. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to clearthe ground.

Rear Position

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a rear tire of the vehicle,use the jack handle (2) and

both jack handleextensions (3). Attach thewheel wrench (4) to the jackhandle extensions (3). Attachthe jack handle (2) to thejack (1). Use the jackingpad (5) provided on the rearaxle. Turn the wheel wrench (4)clockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so there isenough room for the spare tireto clear the ground.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.


Vehicle Care 325

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

6. Take off the flat tire.

7. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

8. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel aftermounting the spare tire.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Tighten each wheel nut byhand. Then use the wheelwrench to tighten the nuts untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

10. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.


326 Vehicle Care

11. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shownby turning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer when

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

using accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 361 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 361 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

When reinstalling the regular wheeland tire, also reinstall the centercap, if equipped. Line up the tab onthe center cap with the slot in the

wheel. The cap only goes in oneway. Place the cap on the wheeland press until it snaps into place.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Caution

Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for anextended period of time or withthe valve stem pointing up candamage the wheel. Always stowthe wheel with the valve stempointing down and have thewheel/tire repaired as soon aspossible.


Vehicle Care 327

Caution

The tire hoist can be damaged ifthere is no tension on the cablewhen using it. To have thenecessary tension, the spare orroad tire and wheel assemblymust be installed on the tire hoistto use it.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.Refer to the following graphics andinstructions to help you:

1. Hoist Assembly

2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)10. Tire/Wheel Retainer11. Hoist Cable

1. Put the tire (9) on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down, andto the rear.

2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle.Separate the tire/wheel retainerfrom the guide pin. Pull the pinthrough the center of thewheel. Tilt the retainer downthrough the center wheelopening.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5), as shown.


328 Vehicle Care

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the holein the rear bumper (8) (hoistshaft access hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer isseated in the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Thecable cannot be overtightened.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and thentry to turn the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrenchto tighten the cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft accesscover.

If equipped, reinstall the hitchcover and turn the retainersclockwise.

To store the tools, do the following:

1. Return the tools (wheelwrench, jack handle, and jackhandle extensions) to thetool bag.

2. Assemble the wheel blocksand jack together with thewing nut.

3. Position the jack and wheelblocks in the driver side trimpanel over the wheelhouse.

4. Turn the jack knob clockwiseuntil the jack is secured tight inthe mounting bracket. Be sure

to position the holes in thebase of the jack onto the pin inthe mounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket tofasten the tool bag on the studand turn the wing nut clockwiseto secure.

6. Close the trim panel door.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure 0 306and Vehicle Load Limits 0 198. Forinstructions on how to remove,install, or store a spare tire, see TireChanging 0 320.

If equipped with a temporary usefull-size spare tire, it is indicated onthe tire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 301. This spare tireshould not be driven on over112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h(55 mph) when pulling a trailer, atthe proper inflation pressure. Repair


Vehicle Care 329

and replace the road tire as soon asit is convenient, and stow the sparetire for future use.

Caution

If the vehicle has four-wheel driveand a different size spare tire isinstalled, do not drive infour-wheel drive until the flat tireis repaired and/or replaced. Thevehicle could be damaged andthe repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Never usefour-wheel drive when a differentsize spare tire is installed on thevehicle.

The vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle.This spare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle, so it is all rightto drive on it. If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and a different sizespare tire is installed, drive only intwo-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare tire iscorrectly inflated.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together. If the vehicle has aspare tire that does not match theoriginal road tires and wheels in sizeand type, do not include the spare inthe tire rotation.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 282.

If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do itsafely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to cause

(Continued)


330 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

cancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 265.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. If the vehicle is equipped withdual batteries, using the batterythat is closer to the starter willreduce electrical resistance.

This is located on thepassenger side, in the rear ofthe engine compartment.

3. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables canreach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other.If they are, it could cause anunwanted ground connection.You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parkingbrake. For vehicles withfour-wheel-drive with aN (Neutral) transfer caseposition, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — notN (Neutral).


Vehicle Care 331

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

4. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turnoff the radio and all the lampsthat are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

5. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

The positive (+) terminal isunder a red plastic cover at thepositive battery post. Touncover the positive (+)terminal, open the red plasticcover.

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals, seeEngine Compartment Overview0 268.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

6. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould be damaged too.


332 Vehicle Care

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) willgo to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

7. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+)terminal of the vehicle with thedead battery.

8. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

9. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−)terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to the metalbracket that is bolted to theengine and supports theresonator, on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


Vehicle Care 333

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Do not lash or hook tosuspension components. Use theproper straps around the tires tosecure the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier. A wheel lift tow truckcould damage the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are

dinghy and dolly towing. Dinghytowing is towing the vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground. Dollytowing is towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels on a dolly.

Follow the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s instructions. Seeyour dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.


334 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

If the two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drivevehicles with a two-speed transfercase that have an N (Neutral) and aFour-Wheel Drive Low (4 n) setting.

{ Warning

Shifting a four-wheel-drivevehicle's transfer case intoN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or others couldbe injured. Set the parking brakebefore shifting the transfer caseto N (Neutral).

To dinghy tow:

1. Position the vehicle beingtowed behind the tow vehicle,facing forward and on a levelsurface.

2. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.

3. Apply the parking brake andstart the engine.

For vehicles with ElectricParking Brakes (EPB), the EPBcannot be applied and the tiresmust be chocked.

4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 217. Check that thevehicle is in N (Neutral) byshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

5. Shift the transmission into D(Drive). Turn the engine off.Then shift the transmission intoP (Park).


Vehicle Care 335

6. Wait for at least 10 seconds,then restart the engine.

7. Shift the transmission to D(Drive), then turn the engine offagain.

Caution

Failure to disconnect the negativebattery cable or to have it contactthe terminals can cause damageto the vehicle.

8. Disconnect the negativebattery cable at the battery andsecure the nut and bolt. Coverthe negative battery post with anon-conductive material toprevent any contact with thenegative battery terminal.

9. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

Caution

If the steering column is locked,vehicle damage may occur.

10. Move the steering wheel tomake sure the steering columnis unlocked.

11. With a foot on the brake pedal,release the parking brake.

12. If equipped with KeylessAccess, keep the RKEtransmitter outside of thevehicle, and manually lock thedoors. Access the vehicle as ifit has a dead RKE transmitterbattery, by using the key in thedoor lock.

Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle

Before disconnecting the towedvehicle:

1. Park on a level surface.

2. Set the parking brake, thenshift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Connect the battery.

4. Apply the brake pedal.

5. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off. Shift thetransfer case out of N (Neutral)to 2 m. See “Shifting out of

N (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 217. See your dealer ifthe transfer case cannot beshifted out of N (Neutral).

6. Check that the vehicle is in 2 mby starting the engine andshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should bemovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

7. Shift the transmission toP (Park) and turn off theignition.

8. Disconnect the vehicle from thetow vehicle.


10. Reset any lost presets.

The outside temperaturedisplay will default to 0 °C (32 °F) but will reset with normalusage.


336 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing – Front Towing(Front Wheels Off the Ground)

Caution

If a two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with the rear wheels on theground, the transmission could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Never tow the vehiclewith the rear wheels on theground.

Caution

Towing a four-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow a four-wheel-drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.

This vehicle should not be towedwith the rear wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground)– Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

Towing a four-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow a four-wheel-drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.


Vehicle Care 337

This vehicle should not be towedwith any wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground)– Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

To dolly tow the vehicle fromthe rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake 0 221.

4. Put the transmission inP (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheelsare locked into the straightposition.


Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 357.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from

(Continued)


338 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Thee symbol is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be powerwashed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Wash

the vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.


Vehicle Care 339

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome orstainless steel. To prevent damagealways follow these cleaninginstructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chromeor stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals, and stripes.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" previously in thissection.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhen dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.


340 Vehicle Care

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climates

may require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 357.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaning

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 341

Caution (Continued)

brushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect other brake parts,including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, mastercylinder, brake fluid reservoir,vacuum pipes, electric vacuumpump including bracket and venthose, if equipped.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

For 1500 Series vehicles, at leastevery other oil change lubricate theouter tie rod ends.

Control arm ball joints on 1500Series vehicles aremaintenance-free.

Caution

Lubrication of applicable Steering/Suspension points should not bedone unless the temperature is−12 °C (10 °F) or higher,or damage could result.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steelfuel door hinge and power assiststep hinges, unless the componentsare plastic. Applying silicone grease

on weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect. If equippedwith power running boards, extendthem and then use a high pressurewash to clean all joints and gaps.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles andshould be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion


342 Vehicle Care

material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.

Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior..

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applycleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow all safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with toomuchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willcreate streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.


Vehicle Care 343

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water orclub soda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning

cloth to a clean area frequentlyto prevent forcing the soil in tothe fabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to remove


344 Vehicle Care

dirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.


Vehicle Care 345

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:

. The original equipment floormats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor matto unlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


346 Service and Maintenance

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 346

Cadillac Premium CareMaintenanceCadillac Premium CareMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 348

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 359

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oil


Service and Maintenance 347

changes and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be more

frequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 198.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel 0 250.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 266.



Cadillac PremiumCare MaintenanceYour vehicle comes with theCadillac Premium CareMaintenance. It is a maintenanceprogram that covers selectmaintenance services during thefirst 4 years or 80 000 km(50,000 mi), whichever comes first.

Cadillac Premium CareMaintenance covers routinemaintenance services, whenscheduled in accordance with theowner manual, including:

. Oil changes based on thevehicle's oil life monitor system.

. Tire rotation every 12 000 km(7,500 mi).

. Engine air cleaner filterreplacement.

. Passenger compartment air filterreplacement.

. Multi‐point vehicle inspection(MPVI) performed by a qualifiedtechnician.

Cadillac requires that all CadillacPremium Care Maintenanceservices be performed by a Cadillacauthorized service dealer.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 269.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures. See Tire Pressure0 306.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 312.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 279.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once



a year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 271.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 312.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil 0 269 and Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 271.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant 0 275.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 279.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare 0 337. Replace worn ordamaged wiper blades. SeeWiper Blade Replacement0 285.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure 0 306.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 312.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 273.

. Inspect brake system. SeeExterior Care 0 337.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care 0 337.

. Lubricate the suspension andsteering components at leastevery other oil change (ifequipped with grease fittings).

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 77.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 337.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 284.



. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check0 285.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 285.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 52.

. Verify spare tire key lockoperation and lubricate asneeded. See Tire Changing0 320.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with4WD. (4) @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7) @ @ @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, poor air quality, areas withhigh dust levels or are sensitive toenvironmental allergens. Filterreplacement may also be needed ifyou notice reduced airflow, windowsfogging up, or odors. Your local GMService location can help youdetermine when it is the right time toreplace your filter.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfer

case fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 274.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Or every three years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with4WD. (4) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7) @ @ @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, poor air quality, areas with

high dust levels or are sensitive toenvironmental allergens. Filterreplacement may also be needed ifyou notice reduced airflow, windowsfogging up, or odors. Your local GMService location can help youdetermine when it is the right time toreplace your filter.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.



(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 274.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Or every three years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care0 337.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies powerto start the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.



. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 357 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs



of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. For

information on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 342 andExterior Care 0 337.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil meeting the dexos1™ specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. Look for the dexos1 approved logo for GM approvedengine oil. See Engine Oil 0 269.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant 0 275.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Automatic Transmission (8 Speed) DEXRON®-HP Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19300536, inCanada 19300537).

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front Axle (4WD Only) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Rear Axle SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, inCanada 19300458).

Transfer Case DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges,Body Door Hinge Pins, Power AssistSteps, Tailgate Hinge, Linkage, andOuter Tailgate Handle Pivot Points,

and Fuel Door Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22845992 A3181C

Oil Filter 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 22808781 CF188

Spark Plugs 12622441 41-114

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331 —

Passenger Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331 —

Rear – 33 cm (13.0 in) 22956295 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed


360 Technical Data

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 362

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 361 for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Model designation.

. Paint information.

. Production options and specialequipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


Technical Data 361

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 357 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 16.5 L 17.4 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Short Wheelbase 98.4 L 26.0 gal

Long Wheelbase 119.2 L 31.5 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


362 Technical Data

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

6.2L V8 J 0.95–1.10mm (0.037–0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing


Customer Information 363

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 365

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 366Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 370Service Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 374OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 375

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toCadillac. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service orparts manager, contact the owner ofyour dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


364 Customer Information

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theCadillac Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800–458–8006. InCanada, call the Canadian CadillacCustomer Care Centre at1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Cadillac,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.3033 Wilson BoulevardSuite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of Canada



Limited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargemediation/arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe Cadillac Customer Care Centre,1-888-446-2000, or write to:

General Motors Cadillac CustomerCare CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesCadillac encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Cadillac Customer AssistanceCenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169www.Cadillac.com

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Service: 1-800-224-1400

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCadillac Customer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-888-446-2000 (English/French)Cadillac Roadside Service:1-800-882-1112

Overseas

Contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user can



communicate with Cadillac bydialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.cadillac.com

The Cadillac online ownerexperience allows interaction withCadillac and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information) :Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information) :View maintenance schedules,alerts, and OnStar onboard vehiclediagnostic information. Scheduleservice appointments.

I (Service History) : Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation) : Select a dealer andview locations, maps, phonenumbers, and hours.

r (Warranty TrackingInformation) : Track your vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information) : Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 360.

H (Other Account Information) :View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio (if equipped), and OnStaraccount information.

F (Live Chat Support) : Chat withonline help representatives.

See my.cadillac.com to register yourvehicle.

Cadillac Owner Centre(Canada) cadillacowner.ca

Visit the Cadillac Owner Centre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Locate owner resources such aslease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatured Articles and Auto CareSections.

. Download owner manuals.

. Find Cadillac-recommendedmaintenance services.

Roadside ServiceU.S./Canada: 1-800-882-1112.

Text Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.Only): 1-888-889-2438.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Service

When calling Roadside Service,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number.

. Telephone number of yourlocation.



. Location of the vehicle.

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle’s powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Service is not a part of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andCadillac reserve the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Service program at anytime without notification.

General Motors North America andCadillac reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner or

driver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Cadillac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is not givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with a sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is your

responsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car or avehicle being delivered back tothe customer, up to 805 km(500 mi).

Cadillac Technician RoadsideService (U.S. Only)

Cadillac's exceptional RoadsideService is more than an auto club ortowing service. It provides everyCadillac owner in the United Stateswith the advantage of contacting aCadillac advisor and, whereavailable, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-siteservice.



A dealer technician will travel toyour location within a 30-mile radiusof a participating Cadillacdealership. If beyond this radius, wewill arrange to have your car towedto the nearest Cadillac dealership.Each technician travels with aspecially equipped service vehiclecomplete with the necessaryCadillac parts and tools required tohandle most roadside repairs.

Services Not Included inRoadside Service. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

. Legal fines.

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. Diesel fueldelivery may be restricted.Propane and other fuels are notprovided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: Pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders arerequired. Once authorization hasbeen received, the RoadsideService advisor will help youmake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the Roadside Serviceadvisor may give you permissionto get local emergency roadservice. You will receivepayment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt toRoadside Service. Mechanicalfailures may be covered,however any cost for parts and

labor for repairs not covered bythe warranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.



General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safety

are preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle

Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not



specify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Service 0 366.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number.

. Driver license number.

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number.

. Vehicle license plate number.

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 83.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehicle



repaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information(US and Canada Only)

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.



Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/216/220/251/310,ICES‐001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer AssistanceCenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000,or write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Onatario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the

OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Additional Information0 380.

Infotainment SystemUsing the navigation system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. See theinfotainment manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.


376 OnStar

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paidsubscription. OnStar requires thevehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collectinformation about you and yourvehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar’s Terms &

Conditions and Privacy Statementfor more details including systemlimitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.


OnStar 377

. Obtain the Wi-Fi® hotspot nameor SSID and password,if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check ofthe vehicle's key operatingsystems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyOnStar Emergency Services requirea specific OnStar subscription plan.With Automatic Crash Response, inmany crashes, built-in sensors canautomatically alert a speciallytrained OnStar Advisor who isimmediately connected to thevehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being started.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires aspecific OnStar subscription plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.


378 OnStar

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Destination Download

Subscribers can have directionssent to the vehicle’s navigationscreen, if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, press the Go buttonon the navigation screen to begindriving directions. Routes that aresent to the navigation screen canonly be canceled through thenavigation system.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following OnStar services helpwith staying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

OnStar Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobiledevices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press=, wait forthe prompt, then say “Wi-Fisettings.” On some vehicles,touch Wi-Fi Settings on thescreen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type


OnStar 379

(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor.

OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App(If Equipped)

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple®,Android™, BlackBerry®,or Windows® mobile devices.OnStar Subscribers can access thefollowing services from a mobiledevice:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send directions to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

For OnStar RemoteLink informationand compatibility, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

OnStar AtYourService

OnStar Advisors can providesavings offers from restaurants andretailers on your route, help locatehotels, or book a room.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling service.

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK, calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.


380 OnStar

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsOnStar Advanced Diagnostics canperform a check of the vehicle's keyoperating systems through amonthly diagnostics report, throughreal time alerts or by pressingQ.OnStar can also monitor tirepressure, if equipped with a TirePressure Monitor System.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase. PressQ to set up an account.

. With the OnStar Basic Plan,every 60 days.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar services ifthe vehicle is disposed of, sold,transferred, or if the lease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStarservice options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Services,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.


OnStar 381

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservices. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damageto the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpSubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five dayswithout an ignition cycle. If the


382 OnStar

vehicle has not been started forfive days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items overor near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 263. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling nametags, saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data orsettings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacy


OnStar 383

statement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third parties

may unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index and https://www.onstar.com/us/en/support/getdocuments.html

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that the

above copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.


384 OnStar

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of a

self-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must notbe misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use of


OnStar 385

the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


386 Index

Index AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Active Fuel Management® . . . . . . 209Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . 229Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 263Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 273Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Passenger Sensing System . . . .84What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Airbag System (cont'd)When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .79AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Passenger Status Indicator . . . 130Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

AlertLane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . 245

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 220Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242


Index 387

Assistance Systems forParking and Backing . . . . . . . . . . 237

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

BBatteryLoad Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Battery - North America . . . .282, 329Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 285BrakeParking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Pedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

System Warning Light . . . . . . . . 133Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Brakes (cont'd)Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 202Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 288

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

CCadillac Premium CareMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 251Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .265, 282, 329

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 2Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 112Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318ChargingWireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 131CheckMalfunction IndicatorEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .92Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 107Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342


388 Index

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 370CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Engine Temperature Gauge . . 128Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . 229Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 365Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . . . 372

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 370Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 2Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 374Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 362Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . 236Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 242Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . .26Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 196If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 197Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 189Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 198Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178


Index 389

EElectric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . 221Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . 134Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 296

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 268Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Cooling System Messages . . . 148

Engine (cont'd)Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 210Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 374Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 168Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 170

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 172

Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 272Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . .217, 282Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Front Automatic Braking(FAB) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Front SeatsHeated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128


390 Index

Fuel (cont'd)Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 138Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . 209Requirements, California . . . . . 251System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 296

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 164Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 346

General Information (cont'd)Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 172Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 138High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 170Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 139

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . 307Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 196Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . 223Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 49Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329


Index 391

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . . 149Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . .28

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 301LampsCornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 170Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . 131Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . 246Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . 248Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . 135Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Level ControlAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 173LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 133Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . 134Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . . 136

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 137Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 170Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Lights (cont'd)Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 129Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Service Electric ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . 136

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 138Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58


392 Index

MMagnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . 226MaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 348Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 131Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . 148Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Messages (cont'd)Object Detection System . . . . . 150Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . . 153Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 154Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

MirrorChild-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 49Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 202

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 271Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 90Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 366OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 378OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . 380OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . 377OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377


Index 393

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . . . 372

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 285

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 209Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 237

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . 84Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 265

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Power (cont'd)Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 207Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . 76Premium Care MaintenanceCadillac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 374

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . 369

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .265, 282, 329

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 373Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Rear Climate Control System . . . 182Rear SeatsHeated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 119

Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 333Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 35ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 89Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 373General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96


394 Index

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Ride Control SystemsMagnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 362Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .77Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .76

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 373General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 368SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . .58Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .56Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .58Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 107

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Service (cont'd)Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 266Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 359Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Parts Identification Label . . . . . 360Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 368Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 245Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Special Application Services . . . . 354Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361


Index 395

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 35Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 284Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Steering System Messages . . . . . 154StepsPower Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 110Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3SystemForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 375Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 365Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 46Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Tires (cont'd)If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Pressure Monitor Operation . . 309Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 308Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Terminology and Definitions . . 303Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 317When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . 135TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 253Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260General Information . . . . . . . . . . 253Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 333Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256


396 Index

Towing (cont'd)Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 262Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . 262Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 316Universal Remote System . . . . . . 164Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Identification Number (VIN) . . . 360Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . . 156Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 135Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 133Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . 248

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . 317Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 96Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 285WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

2k16 cs6 cadillac escalade 23133525a.ai 1 6/25/2015 1:49:11 pm · cadillac escalade owner manual...

Documents